Download THE BMW 3 SERIES.

Contents
A-Z
Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
THE BMW 3 SERIES.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
328i
328i xDrive
335i
335i xDrive
335is
M3
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical features. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
Please also read the other booklets of vehicle literature, e.g. the
Supplementary Owner's Handbook for the BMW M3.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW Group
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
© 2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VIII/11, 09 11 450
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Contents
The quickest way to find special topics is to
consult the index, refer to page 298.
4
7
Notes
Reporting safety defects
204
217
226
228
Telephone
Office
Contacts
ConnectedDrive
Mobility
At a glance
10
18
25
Communications
Dashboard
iDrive
Voice activation system
Controls
30
47
57
61
82
96
Opening and closing
Adjustments
Transporting children safely
Driving
Controls overview
Technology for driving comfort and
safety
110 Lamps
116 Climate
122 Practical interior accessories
236
239
259
264
266
270
276
Refueling
Wheels and tires
Engine compartment
Maintenance
Care
Replacing components
Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
284 Technical data
290 Short commands for the voice activation
system
298 Everything from A to Z
Driving tips
138 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
148
150
159
167
Navigation system
Destination entry
Destination guidance
What to do if …
Entertainment
170
173
176
181
188
194
On/off and tone
Radio
Satellite radio
CD/DVD player and CD changer
Music collection
External devices
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
Symbols used
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as
well; it is an important component of your vehicle.
Updates after press date
Updates after press date for the Owner's Manuals, when necessary, are issued as appendices
to the printed Quick Reference Guide for the
vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,
can also be found on the Internet at
www.bmwusa.com.
4
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of information.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Notes
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all series-specific equipment, country-specific
equipment, and optional equipment that is
offered in the series. For this reason, this
Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates
some equipment that may not be available in
your vehicle, for example due to the special
options or national-market version selected.
This also applies to safety related functions and
systems.
If equipment and models are not described in
this Owner's Manual, please consult the
accompanying Supplementary Owner's Handbooks.
shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you
simultaneously acquire the assurance that they
have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure
optimum performance when installed on your
vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW.
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that
features described in this Owner's Manual
could differ from those on your vehicle.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants.
Updates after press date
Installation and operation of accessories not
approved by BMW, such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your
BMW center for additional information.<
Updates after press date for the Owner's Manuals, when necessary, are issued as appendices
to the printed Quick Reference Guide for the
vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance
and repair methods. You should therefore have
the corresponding work on your vehicle performed only by your BMW center or at a work-
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
5
Notes
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.<
Service and warranty
California Proposition 65 warning
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warranties:
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating conditions and registration requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and registration requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In
such case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance measures:
> BMW Maintenance system
> Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
> Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Notes
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your center, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
At a glance
Dashboard
Dashboard
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Dashboard
1
Convertible: opening and closing
windows jointly 40
2
Convertible: opening and closing
rear windows 40
3
Opening and closing front
windows 40
4
Exterior mirrors folding in and out 55
5
Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb
monitor 55
6
11
At a glance
Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 61
12 Ignition lock 61
13 Buttons on the steering wheel
Telephone: accepting and ending
a call; dialing the selected phone
number; redialing if no phone
number is selected
Convertible: microphone on steering column
Parking lamps 110
Volume
Low beams 110
Activating/deactivating the voice
activation system 25
Automatic headlamp control 110
Adaptive Light Control 112
High-beam Assistant 113
7
8
Convertible: microphone on steering column
Changing the radio station
Interrupting a traffic bulletin
Selecting a music track
Scrolling through the redial list
Fog lamps 114
Turn signals 71
Next entertainment source
High beams, headlamp
flasher 112
Recirculated air mode 118
High-beam Assistant 113
Roadside parking lamps 112
Computer 84
Settings and information about the
vehicle 86
9
10
Instrument cluster 12
14
Steering wheel heating 56
15 Horn, entire surface
16 Adjusting the steering wheel 56
17
Cruise control 75
Active Cruise Control 75
Windshield wipers 71
Rain sensor 72
18 Releasing the hood 260
19 OBD socket 265
20 Opening the trunk lid 35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
11
At a glance
Dashboard
Instrument cluster
1
Speedometer
2
Indicator lamps for turn signals
> Position of automatic transmission 64
3
Indicator and warning lamps 13
4
Displays for Active Cruise Control 75
> Gear indicator of 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double clutch 66
5
Tachometer 83
> Computer 84
6
Engine oil temperature 83
7
Display for
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 87
8
Display for
> Odometer and trip odometer 82
> Clock 82
> High-beam Assistant 113
> Outside temperature 82
> Checking the oil level 260
> Indicator and warning lamps 92
> Settings and information 86
>
9
There is a Check Control
message 92
Fuel gauge 83
10 Resetting the trip odometer 82
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Dashboard
Indicator and warning lamps
At a glance
Supplementary text messages
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
You can call up more information on the Control
Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and
on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to
page 92.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Indicator lamps without text messages
High beams/headlamp flasher 112
Fog lamps 114
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the propulsive forces in order to maintain driving
stability 98
Text messages at the top edge of the Control
Display describe the meanings of the indicator
and warning lamps.
Parking brake applied 63
Canada: parking brake applied 63
Engine malfunction with adverse
effect on emissions 265
Canada: engine malfunction with
adverse effect on emissions 265
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
13
At a glance
Dashboard
Around the center console: controls and displays
1
Control Display 18
2
Hazard warning flashers
3
Driving stability control systems
> Dynamic Stability Control DSC
5
97
> Dynamic Traction Control DTC 98
4
Central locking system 35
Automatic climate control
Air distribution to the
windshield 117
Air distribution to the upper body
area 117
Air distribution to the footwell 117
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate 118
Cooling function 119
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Dashboard
At a glance
Automatic recirculated air control
AUC and recirculated air
mode 118
Maximum cooling 117
ALL program 119
Air volume 118
Defrosting windows 119
Rear window defroster 119
Seat heating 53
6
CD/DVD drive 181
7
Changing
> Radio station 173
> Track 182
8
Park Distance Control PDC 96
Coupe:
Roller sunblinds 126
Coupe:
Hill Descent Control HDC 99
9
Controller 18
Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four
directions
10 Buttons on the controller 18
Selecting menus directly
11
Convertible:
Opening and closing retractable
hardtop 43
12 Programmable memory keys 23
13 Switching entertainment audio sources on/
off and adjusting volume 170
14 Ejecting a CD/DVD 181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
15
At a glance
Dashboard
Around the roofliner
Coupe
1
Microphone for voice activation system and
for telephone in hands-free mode
SOS: sending an Emergency
Request 276
2
3
Reading lamps 115
4
Glass sunroof 41
5
Interior lamps 114
6
Passenger airbag status lamp 108
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Dashboard
At a glance
Convertible
1
2
3
4
SOS: sending an Emergency
Request 276
Reading lamps 115
Interior lamps 114
Passenger airbag status lamp 108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
17
At a glance
iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
The concept
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
iDrive integrates the functions of a large number of switches. This allows these functions to
be operated from a single central position.
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions permit; otherSwise, you may
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users by being distracted.<
Controls at a glance
Controls
1
Control Display
> Move in four directions, arrows 3
2
Controller with buttons
You can use the buttons to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to
select the menu items and create settings.
> Turn, arrow 4
18
> Push, arrow 5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
iDrive
At a glance
Control Display
Operating principle
Notes
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
refer to page 61, the following message is displayed on the Control Display:
> Follow care instructions when cleaning the
Control Display.
> Do not store items in the region in front of
the Control Display; doing so may damage
the Control Display.
Switching off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The main menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
Switching on
Press the controller to switch on.
Buttons on the controller
Symbol
Function
MENU
Open the main menu
RADIO
Open the Radio menu
CD
Open the CD/Multimedia menu
NAV
Start navigation in map view
The main menu is displayed.
TEL
Open the Telephone menu
BACK
Show previous panel
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
OPTION
Open the Options menu
Selecting a menu item
The menu items shown in white can be
selected.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
19
At a glance
iDrive
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
View of an opened menu
When you open a menu, generally the panel last
selected in this menu is displayed. To display
the first panel of the menu:
> Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
> Press the menu's button twice on the controller.
Open the Options menu
2. Press the controller.
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, the menu items that
should be selected are depicted in quotation
marks, e.g. "Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g. "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
> Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previous panel is displayed.
Pressing the BACK button reopens the previous panel. This does not close the current
panel.
> Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened and laid over it.
Another possibility: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu
appears.
Options menu
The "Options" menu is composed of different
areas:
> Screen settings, e.g. "Split screen".
The region remains unchanged.
> Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g. "Radio".
> Other control options for the selected
menu, for example "Store station".
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened.
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
iDrive
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
At a glance
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is highlighted, and then press the controller.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating functions
Some menu items are preceded by a check box.
It indicates whether the function is activated or
deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates
or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock
1.
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is highlighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status box
The status box at the top right displays the following information:
> Time
> Current entertainment source
> Sound output ON/OFF
> Mobile phone network with strongest
reception
> Telephone status
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
> Traffic reports reception
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
21
At a glance
iDrive
Status box symbols
The symbols are divided into separate groups.
Other
Symbol
Voice instructions are switched off
Radio symbols
Symbol
Meaning
Querying current vehicle position
Meaning
Traffic bulletins switched on
HD radio switched on
Satellite radio switched on
Telephone symbols
Symbol
Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call
Missed call
Reception strength of mobile
phone network symbol flashing:
network search
No mobile phone network available
Bluetooth switched on
Roaming active
Receiving text message, email
Checking SIM card
SIM card blocked
SIM card missing
Entering PIN
Entertainment symbols
Symbol
With the Professional
navigation system:
Split screen
General information
Additional information, e.g. from the computer,
can be displayed on the right side of the Split
screen.
This information remains visible on the Split
screen even when you change to another menu.
Switching the Split screen on and off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting display
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the Split screen is
selected.
Meaning
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
CD/DVD player
5. Select the desired menu item.
Music collection
Gracenote® database
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface
Mobile phone audio interface
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
iDrive
At a glance
Programmable memory keys
Entering letters and numbers
General information
1. Turn the controller: select the letters or
numbers.
iDrive functions can be stored on the programmable memory keys and called up directly, e.g.
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and entry points into the menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm entry.
Symbol
Storing functions
Press the controller for an
extended period: delete all
letters or numbers
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
...
Press the desired button for
longer than two seconds.
Executing a function
...
Press the button.
The function is executed immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying memory key assignments
Enter a blank space
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:
Symbol
Function
Entering letters
Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
Function
Press the controller: delete
one letter or number
Entering numbers
Switching between uppercase and
lowercase letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering uppercase letters and lowercase letters:
Symbol
> Displaying brief information:
Press the button.
> Displaying detailed information:
Press and hold the button
Function
Move the controller toward
the front: to switch from
uppercase letters to lowercase letters
Move the controller toward
the front: to switch from lowercase letters to uppercase
letters
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
23
At a glance
iDrive
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
> During entry, only letters for which there are
data are offered.
> Destination search: town/city names can be
entered with the spelling used in any of the
languages available on the Control Display.
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Voice activation system
At a glance
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
This symbol on the Control Display and an
acoustic signal notify you that the voice activation system is activated.
The concept
> The voice activation system can be used to
control most functions by spoken commands.
> Functions that can only used when the vehicle is stopped cannot be operated using the
voice activation system.
> The system includes a special microphone
on the driver's side.
If no additional commands are possible, continue by operating the function via iDrive.
Finishing voice input
Press the
or
button on the steering wheel
{Cancel}
> In the Owner's Manual, {...} indicates commands for the voice activation system.
Possible commands
> In the Owner's Manual, {{...}} indicates the
answers from the voice activation system.
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
spoken as commands.
Prerequisite
The available commands depend on which
menu is currently selected on the Control Display.
On the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
to permit identification of the commands to be
spoken.
Setting the language, refer to page 94.
Saying commands
There are short commands for functions of the
main menu.
Some list entries such as phone book entries
can also be selected using the voice activation
system. Make sure to say list entries the same
way as they appear in the respective list.
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the acoustic signal.
3. Say the command.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
25
At a glance
Voice activation system
Having the possible commands read
aloud
To have the available commands read aloud:
{Voice commands}
For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands relating to settings are
read aloud.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system uses the standard dialog or a short version.
In the short version of the voice dialog, the
responses from the system are given in abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
Performing functions using short
commands
1. "Settings"
Functions from the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands,
essentially regardless of which menu item is
selected, e.g. {Vehicle status}.
3. "Speech mode:"
2. "Language/Units"
4. Select a setting.
List of short command of the voice activation
system, refer to page 290.
Help dialog for voice activation system
Accessing help:
{Help}
Other commands for the help dialog:
> {Help with examples}: information about
the current control options and the most
important commands relating to them are
read aloud.
> {Help with voice activation}: information
about the principle operation of the voice
activation system is read aloud.
Example: playing back a CD
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
2. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
3. {C D and multimedia}
The system plays the last media played.
4. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
5. {C D track …} e.g. CD track 4.
Adjusting volume
Turn the volume knob during the spoken
instruction to select the desired volume.
> The volume remains the same, even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
> The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 276,
in the vicinity of the interior rearview mirror.
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Voice activation system
At a glance
Ambient conditions
> Say the commands, numbers and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis and speed.
> Always speak the commands in the language of the voice activation system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name:
{Station …} e.g. National Public Radio
> Keep the doors, windows, glass roof/panoramic glass roof closed to prevent interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Controls
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
Integrated key
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Remote control
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Glove compartment, refer to page 126
> Driver's door, refer to page 34
New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote controls with integrated keys as additional units or
as replacements in the event of loss.
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain the
batteries' charge status. In cars with Comfort
Access, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 40.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car, refer to Personal Profile, next column.
In addition, information about service requirements is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 264.
30
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set many of your BMW's functions to
suit your personal needs and preferences.
Without any action on your part, Personal Profile ensures that most of these settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
When you unlock the car, the remote control
used for the purpose is recognized and the settings stored for it are called up and implemented.
This means that your personal settings will be
activated for you, even if in the meantime your
car was used by someone else with another
remote control and the corresponding settings.
The individual settings are stored for a maximum of four remote controls. They are stored
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in
use.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
Controls
> Entertainment:
> Setting tone controls, refer to page 171
> Speed-dependent volume control, refer
to page 172
> Assignment of programmable memory
keys, refer to page 23
Central locking system
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is unlocked, refer to page 32
The concept
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 35
> Automatic call-up of the driver's seat position, refer to page 53
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 71
> Trunk lid
> Settings for the display on the Control Display and in the instrument cluster:
> Convertible: glove compartment
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to
page 91
> Date format, refer to page 91
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 94
> Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 94
> Units of measure, refer to page 87
> Fuel filler flap
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Using the door lock
> In cars with Comfort Access, via the handles
on the driver's door and the front passenger
door
At the same time as locking and unlocking via
the remote control:
> Show visual warning for Park Distance Control PDC, refer to page 97
> Welcome lights, the interior light, and the
courtesy lighting are switched on and off.
> Light settings:
> Alarm system, refer to page 37, is armed or
disarmed.
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 111
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 111
> Daytime running lights, refer to
page 111
> High-beam Assistant, refer to page 113
> Automatic climate control: activating/deactivating AUTO program, cooling function
and automatic recirculated air control, setting temperature, air volume and distribution, refer to page 117 ff
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, refer
to page 35.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and interior lamps come on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
31
Controls
Opening and closing
Opening and closing:
Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Convertible: to operate the retractable
hardtop with the remote control, the
doors and trunk lid must be closed and the
cargo area partition must be folded down and
engaged on both sides. Refer also to page 43.<
Unlocking
Press the
button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lighting of the
doors, and the welcome lamps come on.
Setting unlocking characteristics
You can set whether only the driver's door or
the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the
button is pressed for the first time.
1.
"Settings"
> "Driver's door only"
Pressing the
button once unlocks
the driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
5. Press the controller.
Coupe: convenient opening
Press and hold the
button.
The windows and the glass roof are opened.
Convertible: convenient opening
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to open
the retractable hardtop.
Hold the
button down.
The windows and the retractable hardtop are
opened if the doors are closed.
If you continue pressing the
dows move up.
button, the win-
Watch during the opening process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the opening process.<
2. "Door locks"
Locking
3. "Unlock button"
Press the
button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
Convertible: convenient closing
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to
close the retractable hardtop and the windows.
4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the
button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
32
Press and hold the
button.
The retractable hardtop and the windows are
closed.
Watch during the closing process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the closing process.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
Switching on interior lamps
Controls
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
While the car is locked:
Press the
button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Unlocking the trunk lid
Press the
button for about 1 second and
then release it.
The trunk lid opens a short distance, regardless
of whether it was locked or unlocked.
The trunk lid swings back and up when
opened. Ensure that there is sufficient
clearance. To avoid locking yourself out by
accident, do not place the remote control in the
cargo area. A previously locked trunk lid is
locked again after closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the trunk
lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
Convertible: convenient loading
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to partially raise the open hardtop for more convenient loading of the cargo area.
1. Briefly press the
button and, within one
second, press again and hold until the
retractable hardtop stops in an intermediate
position. The trunk lid opens slightly.
2. Open the trunk lid, press the cargo area partition upward and stow the cargo in the
cargo area.
4. Press the controller.
Calling up the driver's seat position
The driver's seat position last set is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
You can select whether or not the seat is reset
to that position automatically.
When this Personal Profile function is
used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
3. Press down the cargo area partition until it
engages on both sides and close the trunk
lid.
4. Press the
button for a longer period to
fold the retractable hardtop back in.
Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
33
Controls
Opening and closing
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
Opening and closing:
Using the door lock
Convertible: if hardtop movement via the
remote control is interrupted briefly, the movement will be completed more quickly if you keep
the corresponding button pressed continuously.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is discharged. Use the remote control on an
extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to
page 30. The remote control for Comfort
Access contains a battery that may have to be
changed, refer to page 40.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
For US owners only
With Comfort Access, you can set how the vehicle is unlocked, refer to page 32.
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Coupe: you can operate the windows and the
glass sunroof via the door lock.
Convertible: you can operate the windows and
the retractable hardtop via the door lock.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful interference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
34
Convenient opening and closing
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
During each closing procedure, and when
opening the retractable hardtop, watch
the process and ensure that no one becomes
trapped. Releasing the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the
integrated key to the corresponding limit positions in the door lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
Opening and closing:
From inside
Controls
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the trunk lid, but does not activate the anti-theft
system. Depending on the equipment package,
the fuel filler flap can be unlocked as needed.
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks:
1. "Settings"
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
Trunk lid
> "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system automatically locks the vehicle after a short time if
no door has been opened.
In order to avoid damage, make sure there
is sufficient clearance before opening the
trunk lid.<
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle as soon as you begin to drive.
Opening from inside
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Press the button: the trunk lid opens unless it
has been locked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
35
Controls
Opening and closing
Opening from outside
Emergency release
Press the button, see arrow, or the
button
on the remote control for a longer period. The
trunk lid will open slightly. It can now be swung
upwards.
Pull the lever in the cargo area. The trunk lid is
unlocked.
Coupe: locking or unlocking separately
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
trunk lid make it easier to pull down.
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.<
Coupe
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1
Locking the trunk lid
2
Unlocking the trunk lid
Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The trunk lid is locked and cannot be unlocked
using the central locking system.
If you give the remote control without the integrated key to someone else while the glove
compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be
opened. This is an advantage when valet parking, for example. Locking the glove compartment, refer to page 126.
Convertible
To close the trunk lid, press it down
lightly. The lid is closed automatically.<
Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
Controls
Alarm system
Panic mode
The concept
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation:
The vehicle alarm system responds:
Press the
> When a door, the hood or the trunk lid is
opened
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
> To movements inside the vehicle: Interior
motion sensor, refer to page 38
Switching off an alarm
> When the car's inclination changes, for
instance if an attempt is made to jack it up
and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to
towing away
> When there has been an interruption of
power supply from the battery
button for at least three seconds.
> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer
to page 32.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Indicator lamp on inside mirror
The alarm system signals unauthorized entry
attempts for a short time by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
> Flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
> The indicator lamp flashes continuously:
The system is armed.
In some national-market versions, unlocking via
the door lock triggers the alarm.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood, or trunk lid are not properly closed, the remaining components are
secured.
Then the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. The interior
motion sensor and tilt sensor are not active.
To switch off this alarm, unlock the vehicle with
the remote control or switch on the ignition.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
Door lock with armed alarm system
Trunk lid with the alarm system armed
The trunk lid can be opened via the remote control even when the alarm system is armed.
Press the
button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
The trunk lid is locked and monitored again as
soon as it is closed.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes:
The vehicle has been tampered with.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel
or tow the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
37
Controls
Opening and closing
Interior motion sensor
Comfort Access
Coupe
The concept
For proper function, the windows and glass
sunroof must be closed.
It is possible to access the vehicle without actuating the remote control. It is sufficient to have
the remote control with you, for example in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically
detects the remote control in the vicinity or in
the passenger compartment.
Convertible
The interior of the car is monitored up to the
height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm system is activated together with the interior
motion sensor even if the hardtop is open. The
alarm can be triggered unintentionally by falling
objects such as leaves, refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt sensor and interior motion sensor can
be deactivated together, for example in the following situations:
> In car washes
> In stacking garages
> During transport on car-carrying trains,
boats/ships or on a trailer
> When leaving animals in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Once the vehicle is locked, press the
button on the remote control again
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subsequently locked again.
38
Comfort Access supports the following functions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Convenient closing
> Unlocking the trunk lid separately
> Engine starting
Functional requirement
> There are no external sources of interference in the vicinity.
> The remote control must be outside the
vehicle to lock it.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
> It is only possible to start the engine if the
remote control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison to the standard remote
control
The above functions can be controlled by
pressing the remote control buttons or by using
Comfort Access.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing windows, the glass roof or retractable hardtop, the system is checking whether a
remote control is inside the vehicle. Please
repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
Unlocking
Controls
Switching on radio readiness
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches on
radio readiness.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch; otherwise, the engine will start immediately.
Starting the engine
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
Locking
Touch the surface on the door handle, arrow 2,
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
To preserve the battery, please make
sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the
vehicle.<
Coupe: convenient closing
Keep pressing the surface, arrow 2, with your
finger.
Convertible: window and convertible
top operation
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
you can open and close the windows and the
convertible top when a remote control is
located inside the vehicle.
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote control has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo area after the trunk lid is
closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning
flashers flash and a signal sounds.<
The engine can be started or the ignition can be
switched on when a remote control is inside the
vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote
control into the ignition lock, refer to page 61.
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the
selector lever is in position P, refer to page 63.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever
is in position N, the remote control must be in
the ignition lock.
Malfunction
Local radio waves can interfere with the function of Comfort Access, for example when a
mobile phone is in the immediate vicinity of the
remote control or by when a mobile phone is
being charged in the vehicle.
If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the
buttons on the remote control or using the integrated key. To start the engine afterward, insert
the remote control into the ignition lock.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the
vehicle or is malfunctioning.
Take the remote control with you inside the
vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert
another remote control into the ignition lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
39
Controls
Opening and closing
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
switched off, the engine can only be restarted
within approx. 10 seconds.
Coupe: opening, closing
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up and a message
appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 30.
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
Individually
2. Remove the cover.
3. Insert the new battery with the plus side facing up.
4. Press the cover on to close.
Dispose of the old battery at a collection
point or at your BMW center.<
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows
while closing them.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate
the electric windows and possibly injure themselves.<
40
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows do not
close automatically.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
Jointly
Controls
Do not install any accessories that might interfere with window movement. Otherwise, the
pinch protection system could be impaired.
Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped
with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them
closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<
Closing without pinch protection
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
All windows open as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening movement.
> Pull the switch:
All windows close as long as you pull the
switch.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the
windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no
door is opened.
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the windows, etc., prevents you from closing the windows normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and
the window reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance
point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there. The window closes without pinch
protection.
Coupe: Glass roof, electric
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof
while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Convenient opening and closing
For information on Convenient opening and
closing via the remote control or the door lock,
refer to page 32 or 34. For information on Convenient closing with Comfort Access, refer to
Locking on page 32.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the window's travel path
prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the window
would continue closing.
Tilting
Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is tilted and the sliding visor opens slightly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
41
Controls
Opening and closing
Opening, closing
Closing without pinch protection
> Push the switch rearward to the resistance
point:
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you hold the switch in
this position.
If there is an external danger, press the switch
forward past the resistance point. The roof
closes without pinch protection.
> Push the switch rearward past the resistance point:
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner
by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on Convenient opening and
closing via the remote control or door lock, refer
to page 32 or 34.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass roof can only be tilted. The system
must be initialized. BMW recommends having
this work performed by your BMW center.
Closing manually
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass roof manually:
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lamps using the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 270.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the roof
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has
been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction during closing from approximately the middle of
the opening in the roof, or during closing from
the tilted position, the closing movement is
interrupted and the glass roof is opened again
slightly.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on
each side to press the clips.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might
fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would continue closing.<
3. Remove the control unit.
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort
will be required for manual operation.
Controls
> Do not attach roof rack systems to the
retractable hardtop, and in particular do not
attach magnetic racks.
> Do not attach rack systems to the trunk lid,
and in particular do not attach magnetic
racks.
> When the retractable hardtop is operated,
the trunk lid swings back and up. Before
operating the retractable hardtop, ensure
that there is enough clearance, e.g. when
parked in front of a wall.
5. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 270,
into the opening provided. Move the glass
roof in the desired direction.
6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the
lamp cover.
Convertible: retractable
hardtop
The retractable hardtop combines reliable
weather protection with simple and convenient
operation.
The following tips will enhance your driving
pleasure in your Convertible:
> It is advisable that you close the retractable
hardtop when you park the vehicle. Not only
does the closed hardtop protect the vehicle
interior against unanticipated weather damage, it also offers theft protection. However,
even when the hardtop is closed, valuables
should only be stored in the locked cargo
area.
> If you open the hardtop while it is wet, e.g.
after driving in the rain, water may drip into
the cargo area. If necessary, remove items
from the cargo area beforehand to avoid
water stains or soiling.
Do not place any objects on the retractable hardtop or on the trunk lid; otherwise, they could fall during movements of the
retractable hardtop and cause damage or injury.
Never move the retractable hardtop when the
rollover protection system is in the activated
position.
Driving when the hardtop is not fully opened or
closed may result in damage or injury.
Do not reach into the mechanism during the
opening or closing procedure. Keep children
away from the swiveling area of the retractable
hardtop.<
The retractable hardtop cannot be moved
at temperatures below +147/–106. A
message appears on the Control Display.<
The retractable hardtop can only be
opened and closed when the vehicle is
stationary. To avoid causing damage, do not
drive off until the hardtop has stopped moving.<
Before opening and closing
> Comply with the safety precautions
described above.
> Ensure that the cargo area partition is
folded down and engaged on both sides,
refer to page 130; otherwise, it will not be
possible to open the retractable hardtop.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
43
Controls
Opening and closing
> Do not place any objects next to or on the
cargo area partition and close the storage
compartment on the left side of the cargo
area.
The side windows move down when the
switch for hardtop operation is pulled or
pushed.<
> Do not exceed the maximum loading height
under the cargo area partition; refer to the
label in the cargo area showing a line indicating the maximum height.
LEDs
> Ensure that the trunk lid is closed.
> While the hardtop is being operated, the left
LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as
the top is fully opened or closed.
> The vehicle should be parked on fairly level
ground. Excessive angle is indicated by a
lamp.
Before moving the hardtop, make sure
that there are no objects on or next to the
cargo area partition, the storage compartment
on the left side of the cargo area is closed, and
the maximum loading height in the cargo area
has not been exceeded; otherwise, damage
may occur.<
Opening and closing
When the vehicle is stationary and at radio
readiness or beyond, refer to page 61:
If possible, conserve the battery by only
operating the retractable hardtop when
the engine is running.
Before closing the retractable hardtop, remove
all foreign objects from the windshield frame as
these could prevent the hardtop from closing
properly.<
In the following situations, a message appears
on the Control Display or an acoustic signal
sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:
> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you
release the switch, the opening or closing
action has not yet finished.
> If the right LED lights up red when the
switch is pressed, the cargo area partition is
folded up, the trunk lid is not closed, the
vehicle is standing on a strong incline or
there is a malfunction. The retractable hardtop cannot be moved.
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted if the switch for hardtop operation is
released. The sequence can be continued in
the desired direction by pushing or pulling the
switch.
A hardtop that is not fully opened or
closed is a safety hazard.
Do not interrupt and resume the closing procedure several times in close succession as this
could damage the mechanism.<
If the hardtop is not fully opened or
closed, the trunk lid cannot be opened
and the windows cannot be moved.<
Convenient opening and closing with
remote control or via door lock
Refer to pages 32 and 34.
1
Push button: open the retractable hardtop.
Pull button: close the retractable hardtop.
2
LEDs
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
Wind deflector
The wind deflector keeps air movements in the
passenger compartment to a minimum when
the hardtop is open and provides an even more
comfortable ride, particularly at high speeds.
Controls
4. Push the fastening pin, arrow 4, into the
opening provided on the left side of the
vehicle until it snaps into place.
Installation
The wind deflector is stored in a protective
cover in the cargo area. Brief instructions for
operation can be found on the protective cover.
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protective cover and unfold it, arrows 1.
5. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of
arrow 5 as far as the first stop to insert the
right fastening pin into the holders.
6. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of
arrow 6 as far as the
symbol to insert the
left fastening pin into the holders.
7. Fold up the top section of the wind deflector.
2. Press together the top and bottom parts of
the wind deflector until the catch engages,
arrow 2.
With the wind deflector installed: do not
recline the front-seat backrests too far if
the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this
would damage the wind deflector.<
Only turn the rotary handle within the
range between the two symbols; otherwise, the cable system inside the wind deflector
could be damaged.<
Removing the wind deflector
Proceed in the reverse order as used for installation.
3. Push the fastening pin, arrow 3, into the
opening provided on the right side of the
vehicle until it snaps into place. Remove the
protective caps beforehand, if necessary.
Protective caps are provided in the vehicle for
the holders of the wind deflector.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
45
Controls
Opening and closing
Folding
To protect the seat cushions or to use the bag
holders, you can fold the rear backrest down,
refer to page 130.
Slide the red release lever towards the middle of
the wind deflector and push the two halves
apart.
Loading function
Cargo can still be loaded on the rear seat of the
vehicle even if the wind deflector has been
installed.
1. Lower all windows.
2. Fold down the top section of the wind
deflector, arrow 1.
3. Turn the rotary handle to position
arrow 2.
,
Fold both sections of the wind deflector forward
and rest them against the front seats, arrow 3.
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Adjustments
Controls
Adjustments
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. As a result, some equipment described may not be available in a particular vehicle, for example due to the options or
national-market version selected. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In conjunction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seated position
has a major influence on your safety in the event
of an accident. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we
strongly urge you to observe the instructions
contained in the following section.
against the cover of the head airbag; otherwise,
serious injuries can result if the airbag
deploys.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circumstances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only temporary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 107.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
For additional information on transporting children safely, refer to page 57.
Head restraints, refer to page 50.
Airbags
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or
arms in the event of the airbag being triggered
off.
No one and nothing should come between the
airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly,
e.g. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard;
otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag deploys.
Make sure that passengers keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not lean
Safety belt
Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits
low across the hips and does not press against
the abdomen.
The safety belt must not rest against the throat,
run across sharp edges, pass over hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt
so that it sits as snugly as possible against the
lap and shoulder without being twisted. Otherwise, the belt could slide over your hips and
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
47
Controls
Adjustments
injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal
collision.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull
the belt in the upper-body area taut; otherwise,
its restraining effect could be impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 53.
Longitudinal direction
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired
position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
forward or back to make sure it engages properly.
Height
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a
danger in the event of an accident of sliding
under the safety belt, eliminating the protection
normally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 50, and on damaged safety
belts on page 54.
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or
lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Angle
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 48 to ensure the best possible personal protection.<
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Adjustments
Controls
Thigh support
Lumbar support
Pull the lever and move the thigh support forward or back.
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
Electrical adjustment
The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 48 to ensure the best possible personal protection.<
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the
switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch
at the top or bottom, respectively.
Backrest width
1
Longitudinal direction
2
Height
3
Angle
You can change the width of the backrest to suit
your individual preferences by adjusting the lateral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch.
Backrest width decreases or increases accordingly.
4
Backrest
5
Convertible: head restraints
Coupe: the head restraints are adjusted manually, refer to Head restraints below.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
49
Controls
Adjustments
Longitudinal adjustment from
outside/behind
To move the front seats forward or backward
from outside or from one of the rear seats: with
the door open, press the front end 1 or rear
end 2 of the switch.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will not be ensured and its full
potential in reducing the risk of injury in the
event of a rear collision may not be realized.
In the event of faults, immobilization, or after the
active head restraints have been triggered,
have the testing, repair, or disassembly performed only by your BMW center or a workshop
that has the required explosives licenses.
Unprofessional attempts to work on the system
could lead to failure in an emergency or to
undesired airbag activation, either of which
could result in personal injury.<
For technical reasons, the head restraint
cannot be removed.<
Coupe: front seats
Head restraints
Height adjustment
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury in an accident.<
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
> To raise: pull up.
Distance
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Front active head restraints
In a rear collision of a sufficient strength, the
active head restraint reduces the distance to
the head.
Do not use seat or head restraint covers
that could impair the function of the active
head restraint.
Do not hang any items, e.g. clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraints. Attach only
BMW approved accessories to the seat or head
restraint.
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Adjustments
Controls
Convertible: front seats
Coupe: rear seats
Height adjustment
Height adjustment
> To raise: press the button upward.
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button downward.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Adjusting the distance to the back of
the head
Removing
Only remove a head restraint if no one will be
sitting on the seat in question.
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, tilt the rear seat
backrest slightly forward and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
> Forward: pull up.
> Back: press the button and push the head
cushion toward the rear.
Entering the rear seats
Coupe: seat with manual longitudinal
adjustment
Do not insert objects behind the head
cushion; otherwise, the head restraint
may not function properly.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
51
Controls
Adjustments
Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.
1. Pull the lever and swing the backrest forward.
2. Push the seat forward.
Previous position
Push the seat backward and swing the backrest
back.
When pushing the seat into its rearmost
position, make sure that no one is injured
and that no objects are damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and backrests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.<
Seat with electrical longitudinal
adjustment
Coupe
Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the
seat has moved into the desired position.
Previous position
Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat
automatically stops in its previous position, and
fold the backrest back. If you release the switch
before the previous seat position is reached,
the seat will stop at its current position.
When sliding the seat backward, make
sure no one is injured and no objects are
damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and backrests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.<
Convertible
Seat backrest warning lamp:
Lights up when a seat backrest is not
engaged. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display.
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Adjustments
Seat heating
Controls
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
3. Press the
button.
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
the LED goes out.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Press the button once per temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press button longer.
Call-up
Do not call up the memory while you are
driving; otherwise, unexpected seat
movement could result in an accident.<
If you continue driving within approx. the next
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
Comfort function
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
The LEDs stay lit.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
Seat and mirror memory
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, refer to page 61.
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
You can store and call up two different combinations of driver's seat and exterior mirror positions.
Safety feature
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and keep it pressed until the adjustment
process has been completed.
Storing
1. Close the driver's door and switch the ignition on or off, refer to page 61.
If the
button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 48 to ensure the best possible personal protection.<
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,
refer to page 61.
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
53
Controls
Adjustments
only at your BMW center. Otherwise correct
operation of this safety equipment is not guaranteed.<
Coupe: belt hand-over
The concept
Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted properly, refer to page 48.
The belt hand-over makes it easier for you to
fasten your safety belt. When you close the
door and switch on radio readiness or the ignition, the belt hand-over extends automatically
and presents the in a position that is convenient
for fastening it around you. After you have fastened your safety belt, the belt hand-over
retracts to its original position.
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
"Fasten safety belts" reminder for
driver's and front passenger seat
The indicator lamps light up and an
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a
message appears on the Control Display. Check whether the safety belt
has been fastened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as
long as the driver's safety belt has not been fastened. The "Fasten safety belts" reminder is
also activated at road speeds above approx.
5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger safety
belt is not fastened, if objects are placed on the
front passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger unfasten their safety belts.
Even if you have not yet fastened your safety
belt, the belt hand-over will retract if you:
> Wait for more than approx. one minute
> Open the corresponding door
> Start driving.
Closing the respective door reactivates the belt
hand-over if the ignition or radio readiness is on.
Front passenger seat
The belt hand-over will extend only if the seat is
occupied and after the front passenger door is
closed.
Damage to safety belts
Pinch protection system
If the safety belts are damaged or
stressed in an accident: have the belt system, including any belt tensioners or child
restraint systems, replaced and the belt
anchors checked. Have this work carried out
If the belt hand-over encounters resistance on
moving in or out, it moves back slightly in the
opposite direction and stops in this position. To
reactivate the belt hand-over: open and close
the door or switch the ignition off and on.
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Adjustments
Although there is a pinch protection system, always check that the maneuvering
area of the belt hand-over is clear. Otherwise it
cannot be ensured that the system will stop
moving in certain extreme situations.<
Controls
rors that were folded in by hand back out into
their correct positions. Mirrors that have been
folded in fold out automatically at a speed of
approx. 24 mph/40 km/h.
Mirrors
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors manually or
with button 3 to prevent them from being damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.<
Exterior mirrors
Automatic heating
The front passenger's mirror is more convex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind
you on the basis of what you see in the mirror;
otherwise, there is an increased risk of an accident.<
Depending on the outside temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated automatically when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Passenger side mirror tilt function –
automatic curb monitor
Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for the
driver's side mirror, arrow 1.
1
Adjustments
2
Switching to the other mirror or to the automatic curb monitor
3
Folding mirrors in and out
The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for
the remote control currently in use. The stored
position is called up automatically when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out
At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/
20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by
pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in
narrow streets, for example, or for moving mir-
2. Shift into reverse or engage the selector
lever- or transmission position R.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger
side tilts slightly down. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into
a parking space.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passenger side mirror, arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
55
Controls
Adjustments
Interior rearview mirror
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion; otherwise, there
is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.<
Turn the knob to reduce glare from the headlamps of cars behind you when driving at night.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated position.
3. Swing the lever back up.
The automatic dimming feature of the interior
and exterior mirrors is controlled by two photo
cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo
cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is
on the back of the mirror.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up; otherwise, the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Steering wheel heating
In order to ensure that the system functions
correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not
cover the area between the interior rearview
mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive
labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield
directly in front of the mirror.
Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up when the steering wheel heating is switched on.
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
Controls
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. As a result, some equipment described may not be available in a particular vehicle, for example due to the options or
national-market version selected. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags refer to
page 107.
Convertible: key switch for
passenger belt
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.<
Children always in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
The passenger safety belt can be locked with a
key switch so that it is prevented from being
pulled out.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller
than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only
in the rear in suitable child restraint systems
appropriate for their age, weight and size. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
The key switch is situated on the side surface of
the passenger-side dashboard.
Children 13 years of age or older must be buckled in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child restraint system that is
appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Insert key and push in.
Children in the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front passenger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even
with a child restraint system.<
Locking the passenger belt
Lock the passenger belt to install a child
restraint system.
Keep key pushed in and turn it until reaching the
stop at the
position. Pull key out at this stop.
After removing the key, make sure that
the switch is in the
position; otherwise, the locking action on the safety belt is not
guaranteed.<
Unlocking the passenger belt
If no child restraint system is fastened to the
front passenger seat, unlock the passenger
belt; otherwise, the freedom of movement of
the upper body is limited.
Insert key and push in.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
57
Controls
Transporting children safely
Keep key pushed in and turn it until reaching the
stop at the position. Pull key out at this stop.
1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest setting, refer to page 49.
Make sure that the passenger belt is
unlocked; otherwise, the front passenger
may become trapped by the safety belt.<
2. Install the child seat.
Child seat security
Installing child restraint
systems
Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child restraint systems.
Otherwise, the protective effect may be diminished. <
Standard child restraint systems are designed
to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt
section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
or improperly installed child restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always follow the installation instructions for
the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passenger are deactivated; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be prevented from being pulled
out in order to fasten child restraint systems.
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
Seat position
2. Remove the child restraint system.
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up as
possible to obtain the best possible position for
the belt. Do not change the seat position after
this.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
Backrest width
The backrest width of the front passenger
seat must be at its widest possible setting. Do not change the setting after installing
the child seat; otherwise, the child seat's stability on the front passenger seat is limited.<
58
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
To install and use the LATCH child
restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system; otherwise, the protective
function of the seat may be compromised.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
Controls
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Coupe
Mounts for lower LATCH anchors
Use the tether strap anchors to secure
child restraint systems only; otherwise,
the anchors could be damaged.<
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors
are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the
backrest; otherwise, the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
For child restraint systems with tether straps
there are two additional anchors, see arrows.
Placement of the tether strap
Coupe
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located behind the labeled protective caps.
Installing LATCH child restraint
systems
1
Installing child restraint system, refer to the
system operating instructions.
2
Make sure that both LATCH anchors are
correctly locked in position.
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child
restraint system in the event of an accident.<
Child restraint system with tether strap
Convertible
For Canadian Customers Only.
The following statement is required by Transport Canada.
1
Direction of travel
2
Head restraint
This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready
tether anchorages. As such neither a child
restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requiring the use of a tether strap can be properly
secured in the vehicle.
3
Hook for upper retaining strap
4
Anchor
5
Rear window shelf
6
Seat backrest
7
Upper retaining strap of child restraint system
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
59
Controls
Transporting children safely
If necessary, fold the anchors upward before
use.
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint holders.
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to
the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving
Controls
Driving
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
You cannot take out the remote control unless
the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches radio
readiness or the ignition on or off.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Manual transmission: when you press the
Start/Stop button and depress the clutch,
the engine starts.
Automatic transmission and Sport automatic
transmission with double clutch: when you
press the Start/Stop button and depress the
brake pedal, the engine starts.<
Comfort Access
Radio readiness
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only
insert the remote control into the ignition lock
under special circumstances, refer to page 38.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock as this may cause
damage.<
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> In cars with Comfort Access, by touching
the surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
61
Controls
Driving
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The
odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch off
the ignition and any unnecessary electrical consumers in order to preserve the battery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as displays in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in enclosed areas;
otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause loss of consciousness and
death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly
toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle
with the engine running; otherwise, such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, always shift into neutral or selector lever/
transmission position P and apply the parking
brake forcefully to prevent the vehicle from rolling.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succession as well as repeated start attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 38.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift into neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Automatic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 38.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Move the selector lever to position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 38.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine starts independent of the current
transmission position.
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving
Controls
Switching off the engine
Parking brake
Always take the remote control with you
when you leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake forcefully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll.<
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Manual transmission
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you
drive off an acoustic signal sounds in
addition. The parking brake is still
1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/
Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 61.
applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
Automatic transmission
The lever locks in position automatically.
1. With the car at a standstill, move the selector lever to position P.
Releasing
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 61.
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/
Stop button.
If the transmission is shifted into N when the
engine is switched off, you will be notified
visually and acoustically of this fact.
2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
3. Remove remote control from the ignition
lock, refer to page 61. The transmission is
automatically shifted into transmission
position P.
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, continuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force on the parking
brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the
rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided braking action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the parking brake is applied.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
63
Controls
Driving
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise,
the engine could be damaged if you inadvertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 65.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is displayed and, in
manual mode, the engaged gear, e.g. M4.
Changing selector lever positions
> With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
out of position P.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
depress the brake until you are ready to
start.<
Vehicle parking
To prevent the vehicle from rolling,
always select position P and apply the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle with
the engine running.<
Disengaging the remote control
In order to remove the remote control from the
ignition lock, you must first move the selector
lever to position P and switch off the engine:
interlock. Removing the remote control from
the ignition lock, refer to page 61.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
64
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engaging selector lever positions R and P. To cancel
the lock, press the button on the front of the
selector lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
Controls
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear.
The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Position for normal vehicle operation. All forward gears are selected automatically.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel consumption is lowest when you are driving in position D.
The gear selected is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed again by the gear
actually in use.
Kickdown
Changing gears using shifting paddles
on steering wheel
D Drive, automatic position
Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the fullthrottle resistance point.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
The shift paddles allow you to shift gears
quickly since both hands can remain on the
steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear
plane, manual mode remains active.<
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot; the Sport program
is activated. This position is recommended for a
performance-oriented driving style.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
To deactivate the sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Shifting gears via the selector lever
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot:
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift paddle –.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
65
Controls
Driving
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system.
sets in which the clutching and shifting is handled by an electrohydraulic system.
With the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch, the gears are shifted without
an interruption in driving power.
The gear selected is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed again by the gear
actually in use.
You operate the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch using the selector
lever and two shift paddles on the steering
wheel.
Overriding selector lever lock
It offers you the following functions:
Should the selector lever refuse to move out of
position P even though the ignition is switched
on, the brake is depressed and the button on
the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever
lock can be overridden:
> Either manual or automatic mode: sequential mode or drive mode
1. Switch off ignition.
> Automatic downshifting and protection
against incorrect gear selection, even in
sequential mode
2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
> Acceleration assistant, Launch Control,
refer to page 70
3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
> Automatic intermediate throttle application
System limitations
The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch has an overheating protection
that protects the clutch from extreme loads.
4. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 270, press the
red lever and with the button pressed,
simultaneously move the selector lever to
the desired position.
7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch
The indicator lamp lights up in yellow if
the transmission becomes too warm.
Avoid high engine loads and frequent
accelerations from zero. If the transmission is
overheated, the indicator lamp lights up in red
and the power flow to the motor is interrupted. It
is only possible to continue driving once the
transmission has cooled down.
Avoid frequent powerful accelerations from
zero and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by
pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting
the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmission to overheat.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
The concept
The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch is an automated manual transmission with two clutches and secondary gear
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster
Shifting into P
The selector lever position and the engaged
gear are displayed, e.g. M4.
Press the button P.
Engaging selector lever positions
> The selector lever can be moved out of
position P only with the engine running:
interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the desired shift will not
be executed: shiftlock.
Shifting into N, D, R
Controls
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.
The transmission is shifted into P if, with
the engine running, you open the driver's
door, do not have your safety belt fastened, and
subsequently actuate neither the brake pedal
nor the accelerator. Before leaving the vehicle,
make sure that the automatic transmission
selector lever is in the park position. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to move.<
The transmission is shifted into P as soon
as you switch off the engine, unless the
transmission is in N and the remote control is in
the ignition lock, refer to page 267. As soon as
you remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, then the transmission is shifted into P.<
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired
direction, overcoming a resistance point if necessary. When shifting out of P or into R, simultaneously press the button 1.
The engaged selector lever position is also displayed on the selector lever.
When you release the selector lever, it returns
to its center position.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
After the engine is switched off, the transmission remains in N if you leave the
remote control in the ignition lock. You can use
this function at a car wash, for example, refer to
page 267.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
67
Controls
Driving
D Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
Kickdown
For sudden acceleration maneuvers such as
passing, depress the accelerator past the resistance point. This provides maximum acceleration.
Sport program and
manual mode M/S
> At a stop, the transmission is automatically
shifted down to the first gear.
> Shortly before the speed falls below a geardependent minimum speed, the transmission automatically downshifts without your
intervention.
Quick downshifting: even in sequential mode,
you can skip over several gears in order to
achieve an optimum acceleration. To do so,
depress the accelerator past the resistance
point.
To return to automatic mode, push the selector
lever to the right.
Gear shifting
Upshift or downshift using the selector lever or
the shift paddles. You do not need to lift your
foot off the accelerator when doing so.
Using the selector lever
Push selector lever toward the left from the
selector lever position D, the Sport program is
activated. This position is recommended for a
performance-oriented driving style.
The engaged gear, e.g. S1, is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear.
The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In the following situations, the 7-gear Sport
automatic transmission with double clutch
does the thinking for you:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, a downshift that could cause the
engine to overrev will not be executed by
the system.
68
> To upshift, pull the selector lever toward the
rear.
> To downshift, push it toward the front.
Using the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
You can also shift manually using two shift paddles on the steering wheel. The shift paddles
allow you to shift gears quickly since both
hands can remain on the steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode if the selector lever is in
position D.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving
Controls
Manually unlocking parking lock
In the event of a power supply interruption such as a discharged or disconnected battery or an electrical malfunction, the
parking lock must be manually unlocked; otherwise, the rear wheels are immobilized and the
vehicle cannot be towed.<
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift paddle –.
Only unlock the parking lock manually for towing and make sure to set the parking brake
forcefully beforehand so that the vehicle cannot
roll. Lock the parking lock again after the vehicle
is parked.
Releasing
Driving dynamics control
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
The driving dynamics control permits you, at
the push of a button, to have your BMW react in
an even more sporty fashion when driving:
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
> Optimal use is made of the engine's speed
range.
> Gear changes occur more quickly.
> The engine reacts more spontaneously to
accelerator pedal movements.
Activating the system
3. Using the allen wrench from the tool kit,
refer to page 270, rotate the cover until it
reaches the stop, arrow 1, and remove,
arrow 2.
Press the SPORT button.
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT
appears in the info display.
Deactivating the system
> Press the SPORT button again.
> Switch off the engine.
The LED in the button goes out and SPORT
disappears from the info display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
69
Controls
Driving
4. Insert allen wrench into the opening,
arrow 1.
Launch Control
Launch Control enables an optimum acceleration when starting off on a road surface with
good traction.
Do not use Launch Control too often; otherwise, the powerful stresses on the vehicle will lead to premature component wear.<
Launch Control is available when the engine is
at operating temperature, i.e. after driving continuously for approx. 6.2 miles/10 km.
5. Rotate allen wrench until it reaches the
stop, arrow 2. The parking lock is unlocked.
Do not turn allen wrench in the opposite direction; otherwise, you may
damage the mechanism.<
6. Remove allen wrench from the opening.
After parking the vehicle, lock the parking
lock again. Otherwise, there is a danger
that the vehicle will roll.<
Locking
1. Press the button, see arrow.
The parking lock is locked again.
1. With the engine running, step on the brake
with your left foot.
2. Activate Dynamic Traction Control (DTC),
refer to page 98.
3. Activate Driving dynamics control, refer to
page 69.
4. With the vehicle stationary, activate the
manual mode and select 1st gear.
5. With your right foot, push the accelerator
pedal past the resistance point. The engine
speed for pulling away is adjusted. A flag
symbol appears in the instrument cluster.
6. When you release the brake pedal, the vehicle accelerates. Keep the accelerator pedal
floored.
7. The upshifting occurs automatically as long
as you keep the accelerator pedal pressed
past the resistance point.
Launch Control will be ready for use again after
you drive a certain distance.
Launch Control is not available for use during
the break-in phase, refer to page 138.
2. Replace cover again.
To maintain driving stability, keep DSC
activated whenever possible.<
3. Clip the selector lever sleeve back into
place.
4. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Jump-starting and towing, starting on
page 279.
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving
Controls
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
1
High beams
2
Headlamp flasher
3
Turn signal
Wiper system
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator
has failed.<
1
Switching on wipers
2
Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3
Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
4
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
The turn signals flash three times.
5
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor
You can activate or deactivate this function.
Switching on wipers
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to signal a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
1. "Settings"
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to operation in the intermittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
71
Controls
Driving
Fast wiper speed
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated for a short time.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do, your vision could be
obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be
added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.
Do not use the washers when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will damage
the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated with the engine running or the ignition switched on.
Washer fluid
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the button lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Therefore, keep it away from ignition
sources and only store it in the closed original
container that is kept out of reach of children;
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury.
Comply with the instructions on the container.<
Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.
Washer fluid filler neck
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Only refill washer fluid when the engine is
cool to avoid contact with hot engine
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire
hazard and a risk to personal safety.<
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before entering an automatic car wash. Failure to do
so could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving
Controls
drive at very low engine speeds for an extended
period.
One lever for all functions
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer
fluid by the same reservoir.
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recommendations.
1
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Storing and maintaining speed or accelerating
2
Storing and maintaining speed or decelerating
Capacity
3
Deactivating cruise control
4
Resuming a previously stored speed
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
Maintaining current speed
Cruise control
The concept
Cruise control is available for use at speeds of
approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores
and maintains the speed that you specify using
the lever on the steering column. In order to
maintain the specified speed, the system
brakes the vehicle when the engine braking
effect is insufficient on downhill gradients.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
Manual transmission
You can shift gears while cruise control is activated. The system is deactivated when you
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly,
arrow 2.
The car's current speed is stored and maintained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster.
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. If the engine braking
effect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the system will brake the vehicle slightly.
Increasing desired speed
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is reached.
> Each time the lever is pressed to the resistance point, the desired speed is increased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
73
Controls
Driving
Accelerating using the lever
Accelerating slightly:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
Accelerating significantly:
Warning lamp
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
The warning lamp lights up when
cruise control is deactivated due to
control intervention by the DSC, for
example. A message appears on the Control
Display.
Decreasing speed
Resuming a previously stored speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
Press the button, arrow 4.
The last stored speed is resumed and maintained.
> Each time the lever is pulled to the resistance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
In the following instances, the stored speed is
deleted and can no longer be resumed:
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the
minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is
achieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Briefly press the lever upwards or downwards,
arrow 3.
The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deactivated:
> When driving stability control systems are
intervening.
> In cars with manual transmission: when you
shift gears very slowly or shift to neutral.
> In cars with automatic transmission: when
you engage selector lever position N.
> In cars with Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch: when you engage selector lever position N.
> When the ignition is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
> When the brakes are applied.
> When the manual transmission is shifted
very slowly or shifted into neutral.
> When the automatic transmission selector
lever is moved into the neutral position.
> When the selector lever of the Sports automatic transmission with double clutch is
moved into the neutral position.
> When DTC is activated or DSC is deactivated.
1
Stored speed
2
Selected speed is displayed briefly
> When DSC or ABS is intervening.
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears
in the instrument cluster display, it is possible that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met.
Calling up Check Control messages, refer to
page 93.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display.
The cruise control is malfunctioning.
You can continue your journey. Have the system checked.
Active Cruise Control
The concept
With Active Cruise Control, you can select a
desired speed which is not only automatically
maintained when driving on open roadways, but
also varied to maintain a selected distance setting as slower traffic is encountered.
Active Cruise Control is a technological
advance over the familiar cruise control and is a
welcome relief from the constant adjustment of
speed that can accompany driving in traffic on
highways or other high-speed thoroughfares.
Especially on longer trips, the system can
reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing
your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely
and responsibly.
Within the limits of its capability, the system
automatically adapts the car's speed to that of a
slower vehicle in front of you. You can specify
the distance to be maintained from the vehicle
in front in four stages. For safety reasons, the
distance is speed-dependent. Based on your
selected distance setting, the system automatically decreases the throttle setting and lightly
applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle
brake lamps will automatically illuminate to signal a following driver to take action. In addition,
it may be necessary for the vehicle or the driver
to downshift, depending on the kind of trans-
Controls
mission your vehicle is equipped with, to maintain the distance setting selected. If the vehicle
ahead speeds up or when the lane ahead
becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to
the speed you have selected by increasing the
throttle setting and shifting gears automatically
or by the driver as needed. Your selected speed
will be held when driving downhill, too.
Since this Active Cruise Control system is a
new technology and operates differently from
conventional cruise control systems which you
may be accustomed to, you are strongly urged
to read all of the pages relating to this system
before use. Pay special attention to the System
limitations section beginning on page 80.
Braking sensation
> If you step on the brake pedal while the system is braking, pedal sensation will be
slightly different from the usual.
> Possible noises during automatic braking
are normal.
Manual transmission
You can shift gears while cruise control is activated. The system is deactivated when you
drive at very low engine speeds for an extended
period.
Range of applications
The minimum desired speed is 20 mph or
30 km/h, the maximum desired speed is
110 mph or 180 km/h.
As with conventional cruise control systems, Active Cruise Control in no way
diminishes or substitutes for the driver’s own
personal responsibility, alertness and awareness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise
controlling the vehicle. The driver should
decide when to use the system on the basis of
road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions.
Active Cruise Control is intended for use on
highway-type roadways where traffic is moving
relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in
city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
75
Controls
Driving
hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or
roads with sharp curves such as highway offramps; during inclement weather such as snow,
strong rain or fog; or when entering interchanges, service/parking areas or toll booths.
It is also important to regulate your vehicle's
speed and distance setting within applicable
legal limits. Always be ready to take action or
apply the brakes if necessary, especially when
the system is actively following a vehicle in front
of you. Otherwise, driving situations could
result that pose the risk of accidents.<
One lever for all functions
The car's current speed is stored. It is displayed
on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.
Increasing desired speed
Press or briefly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is displayed.
> Each time the lever is briefly pressed to the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
1
Store and increase desired speed
2
Store and decrease desired speed
3
Deactivate system, refer to page 77
4
Resume stored desired speed and distance, refer to page 78
5
Select distance to vehicle driving ahead,
refer to page 77
Storing current speed
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, or pull the lever,
arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx.
20 mph or 30 km/h.
76
> Each time the lever is briefly pressed
beyond the resistance point, the desired
speed is increased by up to 5 mph or
10 km/h until the maximum speed of
110 mph or 180 km/h is achieved.
The speed then displayed is stored and
achieved on a clear road.
Decreasing desired speed
Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
The other functions work analogously to those
described under Increasing desired speed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving
Controls
Selecting distance
Deactivating cruise control
> Press downward:
Increase distance.
Press the lever upward or downward, arrow 3.
The displays on the speedometer disappear.
> Press upward:
Decrease distance.
In addition, the system is automatically deactivated:
The selected distance is displayed in the instrument cluster.
> When the brakes are applied.
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
> The speed is reduced to below 20 mph or
30 km/h due to a traffic situation.
> When the manual transmission is shifted
very slowly or shifted into neutral.
> When the automatic transmission selector
lever is moved into the neutral position.
> When the selector lever of the Sports automatic transmission with double clutch is
moved into the neutral position.
> When Dynamic Traction Control DTC is
activated.
> When Dynamic Stability Control DSC is
deactivated.
Distance 4
This is always the preset distance when you use the system
for the first time after starting the
engine.
Use good judgment to select the appropriate following distance given road conditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.
Otherwise, an accident risk could result.<
> When DSC or ABS is intervening.
> The system does not recognize any objects
for a longer time, e.g. on infrequently traveled roads without a shoulder or guard rails,
or if the radar sensor is covered with dirt,
refer to page 78.
> The parking brake is engaged.
When the system is deactivated, you
must brake the vehicle yourself and/or
maneuver as necessary; otherwise, there is a
risk of accidents.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
77
Controls
Driving
Warning lamp
The warning lamp lights up when
Active Cruise Control has been
automatically deactivated, for example due to a driving speed below 20 mph or
30 km/h or a DSC intervention. A message
appears on the Control Display.
Resuming stored desired speed and
distance
Briefly press the button, arrow 4.
The stored speed and distance are regained
and maintained.
In the following instances, the stored speed is
deleted and can no longer be resumed:
> When driving stability control systems are
intervening.
> In cars with manual transmission: when you
shift gears very slowly or shift to neutral.
> In cars with automatic transmission: when
you engage selector lever position N.
> In cars with Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch: when you engage selector lever position N.
> When the ignition is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
3
Selected distance to vehicle ahead
The indicator lights up as soon as the system is activated.
4
Selected desired speed is temporarily displayed
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears
in the instrument cluster display, it is possible that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met. Calling up Check Control
messages, refer to page 93.<
Warning lamps
The indicator 2 flashes in red; a
signal sounds.
The system indicates that you
must brake and/or maneuver the
vehicle yourself. Active Cruise
Control cannot automatically restore the distance to the vehicle ahead.
This indicator does not release you from your
responsibility to adapt your desired speed and
driving style to prevailing driving conditions.
The indicator 2 flashes in yellow.
The prerequisites for operating
Active Cruise Control are not met,
e.g. as a result of ABS or DSC
interventions. Active Cruise Control is deactivated. You can reactivate the system, if desired, by briefly pressing or pulling the
lever when road and traffic conditions permit. It
is not possible to resume a stored speed.
Radar sensor
1
Stored desired speed
2
Shows yellow: vehicle detected ahead
Flashes in red: system cannot maintain distance; driver must brake the vehicle
Flashes in yellow: driving stability control
systems are intervening; cruise control is
deactivated
78
The sensor's ability to detect vehicles ahead
may be restricted as a result of heavy rain, dirt,
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving
Controls
snow or ice. If necessary, clean the radar sensor
located in the front bumper, see arrow. Be sure
to use particular care when removing any layers
of snow or ice from the sensor.
The system cannot be activated if the sensor is
incorrectly aligned.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID:
NF3 ACC2SCU 003YK04001 0000
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful interference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display.
The Active Cruise Control is malfunctioning. Have the system checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
79
Controls
Driving
System limitations
Always remember that the range and ability of the system does have physical limitations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate
your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehicle, stopped vehicle, or stationary object ahead
of you, for example at a traffic light or when
approaching a parked vehicle. Also, the system
does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians
or other types of potential traffic such as a rider
on horseback. The system may also not detect
smaller moving objects such as motorcycles or
bicycles. Be especially alert when encountering
any of these situations as the system will neither automatically brake, nor provide a warning
to you. Also, be aware that every decrease in
the distance setting allows your vehicle to come
closer to a vehicle in front of you and requires a
heightened amount of alertness.<
Active Cruise Control is not and must not
be used as a collision avoidance/warning
system.<
If while your vehicle is actively following a vehicle in front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds
up or the lane ahead becomes clear, then your
vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have
selected. Be aware that changing to a clear,
unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle
accelerating.
Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner
on a highway may cause a delay in the system's
reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause
the system to react to a vehicle actually in the
lane next to you. Always be ready to take action
or apply the brakes if necessary.
While Active Cruise Control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when
you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is
important to be aware that the ability of the system to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g.
when you reduce your desired speed sharply.
The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses
only a portion of braking system capacity and
does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle
braking system. Therefore, the system cannot
decrease your speed for large differences in
speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle
traveling at a much lower speed than your own
speed such as approaching a toll booth or when
a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at
close range.<
Active Cruise Control can only decelerate the
vehicle to approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.
Be certain to deactivate the system when
you pull into an exit lane for a highway offramp.<
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving
Controls
Swerving vehicles
When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane
into your lane, Active Cruise Control will not
recognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane
ahead of your vehicle.
When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves
into your lane, the system may not be able
to maintain the selected distance automatically.
This also applies to great differences in speed
between you and vehicles ahead, e.g. when
quickly approaching a truck. There is a risk of
collision. Once the system has established that
a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it will indicate
that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself. Take action yourself; otherwise,
there is a risk of an accident.<
Behavior in curves
In approaching a curve, it is possible that Active
Cruise Control would react briefly to a vehicle in
the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can
sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not
accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either
case, you can choose to overcome the deceleration by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
Your responsibility
Your actions have priority at all times. When you
press the accelerator pedal while driving with
Active Cruise Control, the automatic braking
function will be temporarily interrupted. Once
you release the accelerator pedal, the desired
speed or the selected distance to the vehicle
ahead is achieved again.
Do not leave your foot on the accelerator
pedal and make sure that no objects such
as floor mats are lying on the accelerator pedal.
Otherwise, the system may not be able to brake
the vehicle.<
Because of the limited range of the system, it is
possible that in curves or on the peaks and valleys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be recognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to
the driver to select a speed that is prudent in
view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
81
Controls
Controls overview
Controls overview
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 90.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures
above +377/+36. You should therefore drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting the trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
1
Knob in the instrument cluster
2
Outside temperature display and clock
3
Odometer and trip odometer
If you still want to view the time, outside temperature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the ignition lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Knob in the instrument cluster
> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition
is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature
and odometer briefly while the ignition is
switched off
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to page 87.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
Tachometer
Controls
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 16.1 US gal/
61 liters.
You can find information on refueling on
page 237.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone, a message briefly appears on the Control
Display and the cruising range for the remaining
amount of fuel is displayed on the computer.
Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/
50 km, the message remains in the Control Display.
With a dynamic driving style, e.g. rapid cornering, engine functions are not always assured.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the engine oil temperature is between
approx. 2107/1006 and approx. 3007/
1506.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a message appears on the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
83
Controls
Controls overview
Computer
Average speed
Displays in the instrument cluster
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
Calling up information
With the trip computer, refer to page 85, you
can have the average speed for another trip displayed.
To reset average speed: press the button in the
turn signal/high beam lever for approx.
2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
Press the button in the turn signal/high beam
lever.
The following items of information are displayed in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption
You can have the average consumption for
another trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
Control Display below.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn signal/high beam lever for
approx. 2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption
To set the corresponding units of measure,
refer to Units of measure on page 87.
Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with minimum exhaust emissions.
Cruising range
Displays on the Control Display
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
The computer can also be opened via iDrive.
> No information
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
Displaying "Onboard info":
Controls
Resetting the trip computer
You can reset all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
> Cruising range
> Distance from destination
> Estimated time of arrival if a destination has
been entered in the navigation system, refer
to page 150.
Displaying "Trip computer":
> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Trip distance
Both displays show:
> The average speed and
> the average fuel consumption.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
You can reset the values for average speed and
average consumption:
1. Select the respective menu entry.
2. Press the controller to confirm your selection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
85
Controls
Controls overview
Settings and information
Operating principle
1
2
Button for:
5
Checking oil level 260
> Selecting display
6
Setting the time 90
> Setting values
7
Setting the date 91
Button for:
8
Viewing service requirement display 87
> Confirming selected display or set values
Exiting displays
> Calling up computer information 84
3
When the lights are on: instrument lighting
brightness 114
4
Calling up Check Control 92
86
The outside temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
Controls
Units of measure
You can change the units for fuel consumption,
route/distance, temperature and pressure.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 61.
2. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the
appropriate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the words "SERVICEINFO".
3. Select the desired menu item.
3. Press button 2.
4. Select the desired unit.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can
be read out from the remote control by
your dealership Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the respective distance remaining or due
date individually in the instrument cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
87
Controls
Controls overview
Possible displays
1
Button for selecting functions
5
Front brake pads
2
Service requirements
6
Rear brake pads
3
Engine oil
7
Brake fluid
4
Roadworthiness test
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. The data for the next service appointment
is shown first.
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
More information
Controls
3. "Service required"
Detailed information on service
requirements
You can call up additional information on the
maintenance regimen on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
Select the entry and press the controller.
7. Create the settings.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
6. "Date:"
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 91; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.
1. "Vehicle Info"
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 264.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the maintenance status or
legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your BMW center
prior to a service due date.
You can check when your BMW center was
notified.
2. "Vehicle status"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
89
Controls
Controls overview
1. "Vehicle Info"
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
2. "Vehicle status"
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
3. "Options"
4. "Last Service Request"
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 30.
2. "Settings"
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Setting the
time format below.
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the time and the word
"SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
3. "Time:"
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the controller.
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
Controls
Setting the time format
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the date and the word
"SET".
1. "Settings"
2. Press button 2.
2. "Time/Date"
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
3. "Format:"
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
4. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.
The time is stored.
The time format is stored.
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
Setting time zone
Via iDrive
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
3. "Date:"
4. Select desired time zone.
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and press the controller.
The time zone is stored.
5. Create the necessary settings for the
month and year.
Date
The date is stored.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 30.
Setting the date format
Setting the date
3. "Format:"
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
In the instrument cluster
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to Setting the date format below.
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
91
Controls
Controls overview
Check Control
Supplemental text messages
The concept
You can call up more information on the Control
Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and
on how to respond, via Check Control.
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the systems monitored. This type of Check Control
message includes indicator and warning lamps
in the instrument cluster and, in some cases, an
acoustic signal and text messages at the top of
the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
The text of urgent messages is displayed automatically.
To exit the display:
Select "OK" and press the Controller.
Symbols
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Depending on the Check Control message, you
can select from among the following functions
in the supplementary text messages.
>
"Service request"
Contact your BMW center.
>
"Roadside Assistance"
Contact BMW Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Indicates that Check Control messages have
been stored. These Check Control messages
can be viewed again later, refer to page 93.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
92
Press the button on the turn signal/high beam
lever.
> Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and remain visible until
the malfunction has been rectified. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this, they are displayed
again automatically.
Controls
3. "Check Control"
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
> Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
4. Select the text message.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed, and a Check Control
message will indicate when you reach this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the words "CHECK
CONTROL".
2. Press button 2.
If there are no Check Control messages,
then "CHECK OK" is displayed.
If a Check Control message has been
stored, the corresponding lamp lights up. It
is accompanied by a text message on the
Control Display.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.
Via iDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
93
Controls
Controls overview
Applying your current speed as the
limit
3. "Language:"
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
2. "Speed"
3. "Speech mode:"
3. "Warning"
4. Select the desired dialog.
4. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Settings on the Control
Display
Brightness of the Control Display
Language on the Control Display
Setting the language
1. "Settings"
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
2. "Language/Units"
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
Controls
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. In bright conditions, for example,
the brightness control may not be clearly visible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
95
Controls
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Switching off automatically
After approx. 55 yd/50 m of driving or above
approx. 20 mph/approx. 30 km/h, the system
switches off and the LED goes out.
Switching on manually
When parking in the forward direction, the sensors must be switched on manually to enable
them to signal an approach to an object in front
of or behind the vehicle.
Park Distance Control PDC
The concept
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight
parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual
indicator warn you of the presence of an object
in front of or behind your vehicle. To measure
the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors
in either bumper.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/
2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not
sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the front sensors and rear corner sensors,
or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed; otherwise, physical circumstances may lead to the
system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated after approx. one
second when you shift into reverse or move the
automatic transmission selector lever to
position R. Wait this short period before driving.
Press the button; the LED lights up.
Switching off manually
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated
correspondingly by an interval tone. For example, if an object is detected behind the vehicle,
the signal tone sounds from the rear. As the distance between vehicle and object decreases,
the intervals between the tones become
shorter. If the distance to the nearest object
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds
> If you remain in front of an object that has
been detected by only one of the corner
sensors
> If you are driving parallel to a wall.
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display.
PDC is malfunctioning. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the
sensors for extended periods of time and only
from a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm.
Manual operation
The LED above the button also flashes.
PDC with visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone sounds. The display
appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC
is activated.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are provided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also subject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with trailer towbars and hitches,
thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs,
can disappear again from the detection area of
the sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected. Therefore, always drive
cautiously; otherwise, there is a risk of personal
injury or property damage.
Loud sound sources outside or inside the car
can drown out the PDC signal. Therefore,
always drive cautiously; otherwise, there is a
risk of personal injury or property damage.<
Controls
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in
adverse driving conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 140.
Electronic brake-force distribution
EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Dynamic Brake Control DBC
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing
traction when you pull away from rest or accelerate. The system also recognizes unstable
driving conditions, for example if the rear of the
car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting
at an angle past the front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions at the individual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
97
Controls
Technology for driving comfort and safety
safety margin again by taking risks, as this could
result in an accident.<
Deactivating DSC
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive output is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The system assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads,
in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered
roads
Press the button for at least 3 seconds until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up and DSC
OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have
been simultaneously deactivated. Stabilizing
and drive-output promoting actions are no
longer executed.
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or starting off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
Activating DTC
In the same way as with a differential interlock,
even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are
still performed to enhance drive output if the
drive wheels experience a significant loss of
traction.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: the DSC
controls the driving and braking forces.
If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC have failed.
The indicator lamp lights up and
DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument
cluster: DSC is deactivated.
Press the button; the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up and TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: DTC controls the driving and braking forces.
If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC have failed.
The indicator lamp lights up and
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster: DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
xDrive
Controls
Activating HDC
xDrive is your BMW's four-wheel-drive system.
The combined efforts of xDrive and DSC help to
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive four-wheel-drive system distributes
driving power variably to the front and rear axles
depending on the driving situation and road
conditions.
Hill Descent Control HDC
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that controls
your speed on steep downhill gradients and
makes it even easier to control your BMW's
handling under these conditions. The vehicle
then moves slightly faster than double walking
speed without the driver needing to intervene.
HDC can be activated as long as you are driving
under approx. 20 mph or 35 km/h. When driving
downhill at a speed of under approx. 20 mph or
35 km/h, the vehicle's speed is automatically
reduced to slightly more than double walking
speed and maintained.
Increasing or decreasing speed
By accelerating or braking you can change this
speed within a range from approx. 3 to 15 mph,
approx. 5 to 25 km/h.
You can specify a target speed within the same
range by using the lever of the cruise control.
1
To increase speed
2
To decrease speed
Press the button; the LED lights up.
When the vehicle is being braked automatically,
the LED flashes.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated at speeds
greater than approx. 35 mph/60 km/h.
Using HDC
In cars with manual transmission:
Use HDC in lower gears and in reverse gear.
With automatic transmission:
You can use HDC in any drive position.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1
Display for target speed
2
HDC display
Malfunction
The HDC display disappears during HDC operation, or does not appear:
HDC is temporarily unavailable due to excessive brake temperature, or DSC has failed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
99
Controls
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary
to use the parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by depressing the
brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in
place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after
releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off
assistant will no longer hold the car in place
after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to
roll backwards.<
System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
A natural, steady pressure loss in all four tires is
not detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation
pressure regularly.
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip
in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are attached
Status display
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The concept
The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires.
The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by
comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving.
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
The system must have been initialized while the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reinitialize the system.
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set inflation tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
1. "Vehicle Info"
Controls
2. "Vehicle status"
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
3. "Reset"
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have
been initialized. The system must then be
initialized.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire pressure:
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization by selecting "Reset".
6. Start driving.
The initialization is completed during driving, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is continued automatically.<
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps light up in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, an
acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat
tire or a major loss in tire pressure.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with
caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
When a flat tire is reported, the Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
With a damaged tire, is possible to continue
driving at speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
When driving with a damaged tire:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire
depends on the load and the stress on the vehicle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid
turning abruptly and driving over obstacles
such as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to
a considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, outside temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. there will be
reduced directional stability during braking,
braking distances will be longer, and self-steering response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate final failure of the tire. Reduce
your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; otherwise, tire components may become
detached, which could result in an accident. Do
not continue driving; instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
101
Controls
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The concept
Check the inflation pressure in the four installed
tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirement
The system must have been reset while the
inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reset the system.
System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
The system does not function correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated even though the tire inflation pressures are correct.
The status is displayed.
Status indicator on the Control Display
The color of the tires represents the status of
the tires and the system.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
A correction is only required when this is indicated by the TPM.
Green wheels
The inflation pressure corresponds to the
desired state.
"TPM active" appears in the Control Display.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
One wheel yellow
> When a wheel without TPM electronics is
installed.
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in the indicated tire.
> Interference with TPM by other systems or
devices with the same transmission frequency.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
102
All wheels yellow
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure in several tires.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
Gray wheels
The system cannot detect a puncture.
Reasons for this may be:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
> TPM is being reset.
> Interference from systems or devices that
use the same radio frequency.
> Malfunction.
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reset the system.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
Controls
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps light up in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds.
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure in the indicated wheel.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
When a low tire pressure is reported, the
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Reset the inflation pressure by selecting
"Reset".
6. Start driving.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The resetting process
is completed automatically as you drive. The
tires are depicted in green on the Control Display and "Status: TPM active" is displayed
again.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. When
driving resumes, resetting continues automatically.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is
resetting, all tires on the Control Display
are displayed in yellow. The message "Low
tire!" is displayed.<
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure is correct in all four
tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. The system must then
be reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire
depends on the load and the stress on the vehicle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
103
Controls
Technology for driving comfort and safety
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid
turning abruptly and driving over obstacles
such as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to
a considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, outside temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. there will be
reduced directional stability during braking,
braking distances will be longer, and self-steering response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate complete failure of the tire.
Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a
stop; otherwise, tire components may become
detached, which could result in an accident. Do
not continue driving; instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Message for unsuccessful system
reset
Yellow warning lamp lights up. A
message appears on the Control Display.
The system has detected a wheel change, but
was not reset. A reliable warning is not possible
at the current inflation pressures.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, refer to page 103.
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continuously; the large warning lamp lights
up in yellow. The tires appear in gray
104
in the Control Display. No punctures can be
detected.
Display in the following situations:
> A wheel without TPM electronics has been
installed:
Have it checked by your BMW center.
> Malfunction
Have the system checked.
> Tire Pressure Monitor was unable to complete the resetting process. Reset the system again.
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continuously; the large warning lamp lights
up in yellow. The tires appear in gray
in the Control Display. No punctures can be
detected.
Display in the following situations:
> Interference from systems or devices that
use the same radio frequency:
The system automatically becomes active
again when the vehicle moves out of the
interference zone.
Declaration according to
NHTSA/FMVSS 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level at which the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Controls
In critical situations, the system can make targeted corrections to the steering angle provided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing
intervention is simultaneously deactivated
when DSC is switched off, refer to page 98.
Malfunction
The warning lamps light up and a
message is displayed on the Control
Display. Active steering is malfunctioning or is temporarily deactivated.
At low speeds, greater steering wheel movements are required, whereas at higher speeds
the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering
wheel movements. The stability-enhancing
feature may also be deactivated. Drive cautiously and think well ahead.
Deactivation
Active steering is deactivated to perform an initialization. A message indicates that the feature
is deactivated. Initialization may take several
minutes.
If the message does not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.
Defect
Active steering
If there is a defect, a corresponding text message appears. Have the system checked.
The concept
Active steering varies the turning angle of the
front wheels in relation to steering wheel movements. It also varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels depending on the speed at
which you are driving.
When you are driving in the low speed range,
e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering
angle is increased, i.e. steering becomes very
direct and less effort is required to turn the
wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other
hand, the steering angle is reduced as the
speed increases. This improves the handling of
your BMW over the entire speed range.
Servotronic
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force
required to turn the wheels relative to the vehicle speed.
At low speeds, the steering force is strongly
assisted, i.e. less force is needed for steering.
As the vehicle speed increases, the steering
assisting power is reduced.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
105
Controls
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display.
Servotronic is malfunctioning or has
failed. Steering response will be different. You
can continue your journey, but moderate your
speed and exercise due caution. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Brake Force Display
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: sharp braking.
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1
Front airbags
2
Coupe: head airbags
3
Side airbags in the seat backrests
4
Convertible: knee airbags
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 47 to ensure the best possible personal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side airbag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be triggered in every collision situation, e.g. not in
minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the dashboard and windows on the front
passenger side clear, i.e. do not cover with
adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach
holders such as for navigation instruments or
mobile phones.
Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other
objects not specifically approved for seats with
integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not
hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets
over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove
the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do
not modify the individual components of the
system or its wiring in any way. This includes
the upholstered covers on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well
as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to
remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of faults, immobilization, or after the
airbag system has been triggered, have the
testing, repair, or disassembly and scrapping of
gas generators performed only by your BMW
center or a workshop that has the required
explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to
work on the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or to undesired airbag activation,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the airbags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front passenger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are activated or
deactivated by the system accordingly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
107
Controls
Technology for driving comfort and safety
The indicator lamp above the interior
rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or
activated, refer to Status of front passenger airbags below.<
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a specially designated child restraint system is detected, as intended, on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precautions and handling instructions under Transporting children safely, refer to page 57.
The front and side airbags can also be deactivated by adolescents and adults sitting in certain positions; the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags lights up. In such cases, the
passenger should change his or her sitting
position so that the front passenger airbags are
activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired airbag status cannot be achieved by
changing the sitting position, transport the relevant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach
seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat unless
they are specifically recommended by BMW.
Do not place any items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Otherwise, a correct analysis of the seat cushion is
not ensured.<
Most child seats are detected by the
system, This particularly applies to
child seats that were required by NHTSA at
the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After
mounting a child seat, ensure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbag is
lit. It indicates that the child seat has been
detected and that the front passenger airbags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not light up as long
as a person of sufficient size and in a correct
sitting position is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front passenger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags shows the functional status of the front
passenger front and side airbags in accordance
with whether and how the front passenger seat
is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether
the front passenger airbags are activated or
deactivated.
108
As of radio readiness, refer to page 61, the
warning lamp lights up briefly to indicate that
the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners
are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up at radio
readiness or beyond.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay; otherwise,
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.<
Controls
2. Push the protection bar halfway down from
above.
3. Release the locking lever.
4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps
into place.
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is activated
automatically in the event of an accident, a critical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's
longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact.
The protection bars behind the rear head
restraints deploy within fractions of a second.
As a supplementary system to the reinforced
windshield frame, the rollover protection system ensures that the necessary headroom is
maintained for all vehicle occupants.
Always keep the area of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In minor accidents, you are protected by the
fastened safety belt and, depending on accident severity, by the safety belt tensioner and
multi-phase airbag retention system.<
Resetting
If the rollover protection system was not
impacted after being automatically activated, it
can be reset by lowering the protection bars to
their original positions. This does not require
tools.
5. Repeat the procedure for the other protection bar.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after an unexpected activation.
Never move the retractable hardtop when
the rollover protection system is in the
activated position.
Do not make any modifications to the individual
components of the rollover protection system
or its cabling.
Work on the rollover protection system should
be performed only by your BMW center.
Incorrectly performed work on the system may
lead to system failure or incorrect operation.
To check the system and ensure flawless longterm operation, always observe the service
intervals, refer to page 87.<
1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold
it there.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
109
Controls
Lamps
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
At a glance
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps will discharge the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not have enough power to start the
engine. It is preferable to switch on the lefthand or right-hand roadside parking lamps,
refer to page 112.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control
0
Lamps off,
daytime running lights
1
Parking lamps and daytime running lights
2
Low beams,
welcome lamps
3
Automatic headlamp control, daytime running lights, welcome lamps, High-beam
Assistant, and Adaptive Light Control
Parking lamps/low beams,
automatic headlamp control
General information
When the driver's door is opened with ignition
switched off, then the exterior lighting is automatically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2, or 3.
110
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depending on ambient lighting conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The
Adaptive Light Control is active. The LED next
to the symbol is illuminated when the low
beams are on. You can also activate the daytime
running lights, refer to page 111. In the situations described above, the lamps then automatically switch from daytime running lights to low
beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the
sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low beams remain switched on independent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the fog lamps.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low-beam headlamps manually under these
conditions.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Lamps
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when you park the car, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when you
unlock the vehicle.
Controls
4. Set a time of duration, or 0 s to deactivate
the function.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights light up in switch
position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than
the low beams.
The tail lamps may also light up.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lights
1. "Settings"
Pathway lighting
2. "Lighting"
If the headlamp flasher is activated after switching off the ignition with the lamps switched off,
the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time.
3. "Daytime running lamps"
Setting duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.:"
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
111
Controls
Lamps
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
High beams/roadside parking
lamps
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h,
e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an
additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched
on that lights up the inside area of the curve.
1
High beams
Activating Adaptive Light Control
2
Headlamp flasher
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 110.
The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on
automatically, depending on the steering wheel
angle or turn signal indicator.
3
Roadside parking lamps
Standstill function: to avoid blinding oncoming
traffic, the Adaptive Light Control directs light
toward the front passenger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When you are reversing, only the corner-illuminating lamps are switched on and active on
both sides.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display.
The Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or failed. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
112
Roadside parking lamps, left or right
There is an additional option of switching on the
lamps on the side of the car facing the road
when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the pressure point for a longer
period, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the
pressure point, arrow 3.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Lamps
High-beam Assistant
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off. The procedure is controlled
by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview
mirror. The assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation allows. It handles this task for you and
gives you the benefit of the best possible view.
You can intervene at any time and switch the
high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to
page 110.
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
push the turn signal/high beam lever in the
direction of the high beam.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the high beams
are activated. The system automatically switches from high beams to low beams
and vice versa in response to oncoming traffic,
traffic ahead of you, and adequate ambient
lighting, e.g. on city streets.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
Whenever you wish, or when the situation
requires, you can intervene:
> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the
high beams, but you would like to drive with
the low beams, simply switch off the high
beams using the turn signal/high beam
lever. This deactivates the High-beam
Assistant.
To reactivate the system, briefly push the
turn signal/high beam lever toward the high
beams again.
Controls
> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the
low beams, but you would like to drive with
the high beams, switch on the high beams
as usual. This deactivates the system and
the high beams need to be switched off
manually, if necessary.
To reactivate the system, briefly push the
turn signal/high beam lever toward the high
beams again.
> Use the headlamp flasher as usual with the
low beams switched on.
System limitations
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve
as a substitute for the driver's personal
judgment of when to use the high beams.
Therefore, manually switch off the high beams
in situations where this is required to avoid a
safety risk.<
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
> In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation
> In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings
> In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways
> In poorly lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs
> At low speeds
> When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.
> If the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on
the front of the interior rearview mirror using
a cloth moistened with a small amount of
glass cleaner.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
113
Controls
Lamps
Activating via iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "High beam assistant"
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Fog lamps
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are switched on.
1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until
the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the brightness setting and scale the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
The parking lamps or low beams must
be switched on for the fog lamps to
operate. The green indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up whenever the
fog lamps are on.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the
desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.
The fog lamps are switched off while you activate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high
beams.
Interior lamps
If the automatic headlamp control is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
The interior lamps, the footwell lamps, entry
lamps, cargo area lamp, and courtesy lamps are
controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Lamps
Controls
To reduce the drain on the battery, a few
minutes after the radio readiness is
switched off, refer to Start/Stop button on
page 61, all lights in the vehicle's passenger
compartment are switched off.<
Switching interior lamps on/off
manually
Interior lamps, front and rear:
To switch on and off, press the button.
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
entry lamps, and courtesy lamps permanently,
press the button for the front interior lamps for
about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
There are reading lamps at the front and rear,
next to the interior lights. To switch on and off,
press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
115
Controls
Climate
Climate
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Overview
1
2
Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
3
Air to the footwell
4
Air distribution, manual
Air to the upper body area
Draft-free ventilation 119
5
Temperature, left side
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Climate
Controls
6
Maximum cooling
7
AUTO program
8
Air volume, manual adjustment; AUTO
intensity
13 Switching cooling function on/off manually
9
Automatic recirculated air control AUC/
Recirculated air mode
15 Seat heating, right side 53
12 Defrosting windows and removing condensation
14 Rear window defroster
10 Temperature, right side
16 Interior temperature sensor, please keep
clear
11 ALL program
17 Seat heating, left side 53
Automatic climate control
Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution
and air volume for almost all conditions, refer to
AUTO program below. All you need to do is
select an interior temperature which is comfortable for you.
The following sections inform you in detail
about how to adjust the settings.
Temperature
Turn to set the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as
quickly as possible regardless of the season,
using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile
settings on page 31.
Avoid rapid switching between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Adjusting air distribution manually
Maximum heating power can be obtained with
the highest setting, regardless of the outside
temperature.
The air distribution can be
switched on and off manually. The
air is directed to the windshield, to
the upper body area and to the
footwell.
The automatic air distribution can be switched
back on by pressing the AUTO button. The
cooling function is switched on automatically
and the manual air distribution setting is
cleared.
The system cools steadily in the lowest setting,
regardless of the outside temperature.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest
temperature, maximum air volume
and recirculated air mode.
Air flows out of the vent outlets for the upper
body region. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
> Above an outside temperature of approx.
327/06
> When the engine is running
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
117
Controls
Climate
AUTO program
Adjusting air volume manually
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution and
temperature are controlled auto-
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left side of the button to
reduce the air volume. Press the
right side of the button to
matically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity and outside influences, the air is
directed toward the windshield, the side windows, the upper body and the footwell.
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the cooling function.
At the same time, a condensation sensor controls the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible.
The program is switched off when the air distribution is set manually or the button is pressed
again.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted:
Press the left side of the button to
reduce the intensity. Press the
right side of the button to
increase it.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Convertible program
The Convertible program is active when the
hardtop is open and the AUTO program is
switched on. In the Convertible program, the
automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the hardtop open. In addition, the air
volume is increased as vehicle speed increases.
The effectiveness of the Convertible program can be enhanced considerably by
installing the wind deflector.<
118
increase it.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off
entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The
display remains the same.
Automatic recirculated air control
AUC/Recirculated air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to
select an operating mode:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air and
controls the shut-off automatically.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated air mode:
the supply of outside air is permanently
shut off. If the windows fog over, switch off
recirculated air mode and increase the air
volume, if necessary. Make sure that air can
flow onto the windshield.
The recirculated air mode should not be
used over an extended period of time;
otherwise, the air quality inside the car will deteriorate continuously.<
Via the button on the steering wheel
You can switch quickly between the recirculated air mode and the previous mode using a
button on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Climate
ALL program
Controls
Switching the system on/off
Press the button.
The current temperature setting
on the driver's side is transferred to
the front passenger side.
If the temperature setting on the driver's side is
changed, the temperature on the front passenger side is changed as well.
The program is switched off when the setting is
adjusted on the front passenger side or the button is pressed again.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Quickly removes ice and condensation from the windshield and
front side windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
function.
Switching off
With the blower at its lowest setting, press the left side of the button to switch off the automatic climate control.
All displays are cleared except for the rear window defroster if it is switched on.
The outside air supply is blocked when
the automatic climate control is switched
off. If the air quality deteriorates or the window
fogs over, switch the system back on and
increase the air volume.<
Switching on
Press any button except the ALL or the rear
window defroster button to reactivate the automatic climate control.
Ventilation
Switching cooling function on/off
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled while the engine is running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified
and – depending on the temperature setting – warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
1
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the cooling function.
Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2
Use the levers to change the direction of the
airflow
3
Thumbwheel for more or less cool air from
the vents for the upper body area
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The defroster is switched off automatically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
upper wires serve as an antenna and are not
part of the rear window defroster.
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, e.g. if it has become too hot
in the car.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
119
Controls
Climate
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and not straight at you.
Ventilation in the rear
Due to its high power consumption, it should
not be switched on twice in a row without driving in between to allow the battery to recharge.
The air emerges from the air vents for the upper
body area in the instrument panel. The air vents
must therefore be open.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
1
Use the thumbwheel to adjust the temperature:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
2
Use the thumbwheel to smoothly open and
close the air vents
3
Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gaseous
pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW center replaces this combined filter during routine
maintenance.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control
Display flashes.
Preselecting switch-on times
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2".
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
Parked car ventilation
The concept
The parked car ventilation provides ventilation
to the passenger compartment and lowers its
temperature, if necessary. It is ready for use at
any outside temperature, as of radio readiness.
The parked car ventilation remains switched on
for approx. 30 minutes. Two different switch-on
times can be preselected. The system can also
be switched on and off directly.
120
5. Turn the controller: set the hours.
6. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Climate
Controls
7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
8. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control
Display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control
Display flashes when the system has switched
on.
The respective system is switched on
within the next 24 hours only. After these
have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
121
Controls
Practical interior accessories
Practical interior accessories
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Integrated universal remote
control
Compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
device to be operated, you can generally assume that the device is compatible with
the Integrated universal remote control.
For additional questions, please consult:
> Your BMW center.
> www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror
The concept
The Integrated universal remote control can be
used to operate up to 3 functions of remotecontrolled devices such as garage door openers or lighting systems. The Integrated universal remote control thus replaces as many as
three different hand-held transmitters. To operate them, the buttons on the interior rearview
mirror must be programmed with the desired
functions. Programming requires the hand-held
transmitter for the respective device.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the integrated universal remote control to operate a
device, always inspect the immediate area to
make certain that no people, animals or objects
are within the pivoting or travel range of the
device being operated.
Also follow the safety instructions supplied with
the hand-held transmitter.<
For security reasons, make sure to delete the
stored functions before selling the vehicle, refer
to page 124.
1
LED
2
Buttons
3
Hand-held transmitter, required for programming.
Programming
General information
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial operation:
Simultaneously hold down the right and left
buttons on the inside mirror for approx.
20 seconds until the LED on the inside mirror flashes.
All programs of the buttons on the rearview
mirror are deleted.
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the
device to be controlled approx. 1 in/2.5 cm
to 3 in/8 cm away from the buttons on the
inside mirror.
The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be programmed on the inside mirror.
The LED on the inside mirror will flash
slowly at first.
5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release
both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates
that the button on the inside mirror has
been programmed.
If the LED does not flash rapidly within
60 seconds, change the distance between
the inside mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat this step. This may
require several attempts. Allow at least
15 seconds between attempts.
6. To program additional functions on the
other buttons of the inside mirror, repeat
steps 3 through 5.
The buttons on the inside mirror can be used to
operate the devices if the ignition is switched
on.
Special procedure with alternatingcode systems
If the device fails to function even after repeated
programming, check whether the device to be
controlled uses an alternating-code system.
To do so, either read the instructions for the
device or hold down the programmed button on
the inside mirror. If the LED on the inside mirror
flashes quickly at first and then remains lit for
2 seconds, the device uses an alternating-code
system. The LED flashes and lights up repeatedly for approx. 20 seconds.
In devices with an alternating-code system, the
Integrated universal remote control and the
device must also be synchronized.
Controls
For information about synchronizing can also
be found in the operating instructions for the
device to be set.
Programming will be easier with the aid of a
second person.
Synchronizing:
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the Integrated universal remote
control as described above.
3. Locate and press the synchronization button on the device to be set. You have
approx. 30 seconds to perform the next
step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
inside mirror for approx. 3 seconds and then
release it. Repeat this operation, up to three
times if necessary, to complete the synchronization. If the synchronization has
succeeded, the programmed function is
performed.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the
device to be controlled approx. 1 in/2.5 cm
bis 3 in/8 cm away from the buttons on the
inside mirror.
The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
3. Press the desired button on the inside mirror.
4. If the LED on the inside mirror flashes
slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the
transmit key of the hand-held transmitter.
5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release
both buttons.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after
approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance and
repeat the step.
Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly
after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step or, if the programming
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
123
Controls
Practical interior accessories
by means of the hand-held transmitter was
interrupted, hold down the button on the
inside mirror and then press and release the
button on the hand-held transmitter several
times, holding it down for 2 seconds each
time.
Digital compass
Operation
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the integrated universal remote control to operate a
device, always inspect the immediate area to
make certain that no people, animals or objects
are within the pivoting or travel range of the
device being operated.
Also follow the safety instructions supplied with
the hand-held transmitter.<
The button on the inside mirror can be used to
operate the device, for example the garage
door, if the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on. To do so, within the reception
range of the device, press the button of the
device until the function is triggered. The LED
on the inside mirror remains lit during transmission of the radio signal.
Deleting stored functions
Simultaneously hold down the right and left
buttons on the inside mirror for approx. 20 seconds until the LED on the inside mirror flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
124
1
Adjustment button
2
Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen or similar item. The following
adjustment options are displayed one after the
other, depending on how long you keep the
adjustment button pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering
> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your
vehicle's geographic location so that the com-
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment
button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of
the compass zone set is shown in the display.
Procedure
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corresponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of
your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Convertible: ensure that the retractable
hardtop is fully closed.
4. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at
least one full circle at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h.
If calibration is successful, the display
changes from C to a compass direction.
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
does.
5. Convertible: open the retractable hardtop
fully and repeat step 4.
> Not all compass directions are shown.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to righthand or left-hand steering, in accordance with
your vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
125
Controls
Practical interior accessories
Set the language
Closing
You can set the language of the display:
Fold the cover up.
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Press the adjustment button
again briefly to switch between English "E" and
German "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the integrated key of the remote control, refer to
page 30.
Convertible: when you lock the vehicle from the
outside, the glove compartment is locked as
well.
Coupe:
Roller sunblinds
USB interface for data transmission
Briefly press the button in the center console to
raise or lower the roller sunblind.
Port for importing and exporting data on USB
devices, e.g. music collections, refer to
page 189.
Observe the following when connecting:
Glove compartment
> Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB audio interface.
Opening
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard discs.
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest
Storage compartment
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an accident while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
126
The center armrest between the front seats
contains either a compartment or the cover for
the snap-in adapter, depending on the equipment version.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Do not place unsecured objects in them;
otherwise, they could endanger the car's
occupants, e.g. in the event of braking or evasive maneuvers.<
Do not place non-slip pads, e.g. anti-slip
mats, on the dashboard; the materials of
these pads may damage it.<
Storage compartments in the rear
console
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Adjustments
Slide the center armrest on the driver's side into
the desired position.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment version, the following storage compartments can
be found in the rear console:
> Storage tray
> Storage compartment with cover
> Cupholders
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the vehicle speakers:
Coupe: clothes hooks
> AUX-IN port, refer to page 194
> USB audio interface/extended connectivity
of the music player in the mobile phone,
refer to page 195.
Storage compartments inside
the vehicle
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you will
find compartments beside the steering column,
in the front doors and in the center console.
Nets are provided on the front-seat backrests.
Press the upper edge to flip open.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they could endanger the car's occupants,
e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
127
Controls
Practical interior accessories
Cupholders
Convertible: rear
Use lightweight and shatterproof containers and do not transport hot beverages;
otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of the accident. Do not force containers that are too large into the cupholders; otherwise, damage could result.<
There are two additional cupholders in the rear
console.
Front
Press the button to open.
Before folding down the rear seat backrest or using the transport bag, remove all
containers from the cupholder and close it. Do
not place objects into the cupholder and use
force to close it. Do not use the cupholder as a
grab handle.<
Opening
Briefly press the center of the cover.
Ashtray
Closing
Briefly press the cover in the center and push in
the cupholder.
Opening
Coupe: rear
There are two additional cupholders in the rear
center armrest.
Push the ridge on the cover.
Press the front of the armrest.
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Connecting electrical
appliances
Emptying
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as a hand lamp, car vacuum
cleaner, etc. if at least one of the following sockets is available.
The total load of all sockets should not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Lift out the insert.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Lighter
Do not connect battery chargers to the
sockets built into the vehicle at the plant;
doing so may damage the vehicle.<
Cigarette lighter socket
To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter
out of the socket.
Socket in the front passenger footwell
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the
remote control so that children cannot operate
the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
A socket is located under the glove compartment on the left.
Socket in the center armrest
External audio device, refer to page 127.
Coupe: socket in cargo area
Open the cap.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
129
Controls
Practical interior accessories
Coupe:
Through-loading system
Convertible:
Cargo loading
Opening
Enlarging the cargo area
1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the
corresponding lever in the cargo area.
When the hardtop is closed you can enlarge the
cargo area:
To do so, push the cargo area partition upward.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves forward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.
Before opening the hardtop, push the cargo
area partition down until it engages on both
sides.
Before moving the hardtop, ensure that
there are no objects on or next to the
cargo area partition; otherwise, parts of the
hardtop may be damaged. Do not exceed the
maximum loading height; refer to the sticker in
the cargo area showing a line indicating the
maximum height. Do not use force to push
down the cargo area partition.<
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to its upright position and engage it.
When returning the backrest to its seating
position, make sure that the seat's locking mechanism engages properly. Otherwise,
cargo could be thrown around in the event of
sharp braking or swerving and endanger the
occupants.<
The retractable hardtop can only be
opened if the cargo area partition is in its
lowermost position and engaged on both
sides.<
Folding down the rear seat backrest
Opening
The lashing eyes in the cargo area provide you
with a way to attach cargo area nets or draw
straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer
to page 143.
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
You can fold down the rear seat backrest to
transport light objects in the rear without damaging the seats. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, the mounting points for the cargo
area net are found on the rear panel of the backrest. To unlock the rear seat backrest: press the
button on the driver's or the opposite side.
Controls
Storage compartment behind the rear
seat backrest
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
When returning the backrest to its seating
position, make sure that the seat's locking mechanism engages properly. Otherwise,
cargo could be thrown around in the event of
sharp braking or swerving and endanger the
occupants.<
Bag holder
When the rear seat backrest is folded down, you
will find two bag holders on the cargo area wall:
1. Fold open the holder by pressing the button.
2. Press the handles of the bag onto the
holder from above.
Only hang light shopping bags or other
suitable objects from the holders; otherwise, braking maneuvers and swerving, for
example, may lead to a safety hazard due to
objects flying about the passenger compartment. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo area if it has been appropriately
secured.<
A storage compartment is located behind the
rear seat backrest. To access the storage compartment: remove the insert or fold down the
rear seat backrest.
When the rear seat backrest is folded
down or the insert has been removed,
only transport small light objects in the storage
compartment; otherwise, braking maneuvers
and swerving, for example, may lead to a safety
hazard due to objects flying about the passenger compartment. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.<
Storage compartments inside
the cargo area
Coupe
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo area:
> Left storage compartment, e.g. for storing a
box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD jackets, depending on vehicle equipment version
> Net for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the mounts on the floor panel
> Hooks for hanging up, e.g., shopping bags
or tote bags
For more information on loading the vehicle,
refer to page 141.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
131
Controls
Practical interior accessories
> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for
securing small objects such as a folding
umbrella
> Net for small objects on the right trim panel
of the cargo area
Convertible
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo area:
> Storage compartment on the left side of the
cargo area. To open turn handle by 90°
> Net for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the mounts on the floor panel
> Rubber strap for subdividing the cargo area;
can be hooked onto the lateral lashing eyes
Coupe: ski bag
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2 snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.9 ft 10 in/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft
10 in/2.10 m length are loaded, the overall
capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its
tapered design.
Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the cover.
> Stowage compartment under the floor
panel
Folding up the floor panel
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
load of 55 lbs./25 kg for the storage compartment under the floor panel; otherwise, damage may result.<
Coupe
Press the floor panel up and secure it with the
catch.
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski
bag between the front seats and insert the
skis or snowboards.
4. Clip the hooks of the ski bag retaining strap
into the eyelet.
Convertible
To lift, grab hold of the floor panel at the opening at the rear of the panel.
Lashing eyes
You will find lashing eyelets in the cargo area for
securing luggage items with nets or tensioning
straps, refer to page 143.
132
Only place clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
Securing cargo
Controls
Convertible: through-loading
opening with integrated
transport bag
The transport bag is designed for safe, clean
transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up
to 2 snowboards.
After loading, secure the ski bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described; otherwise, it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
To store the ski bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
When the rear seat backrest is folded up, you
can remove the insert and use the transport bag
with the regular through-loading opening. To
transport larger objects, you can fold down the
rear seat backrest to create an expanded
through-loading opening.
With the transport bag you can stow skis with a
length of up to 6.2 ft/1.90 m. When skis of 6.2 ft/
1.90 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of
the transport bag is reduced due to its tapered
design.
Loading
1. For loading using the regular through-loading opening:
Press the button down and remove the
insert from the front.
For loading with the through-loading opening expanded:
Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to
page 130.
3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various
inserts available, contact your BMW center.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
133
Controls
Practical interior accessories
2. Front cover: press the two recesses
together and fold the cover down until it
engages.
3. In the cargo area: press the two recesses
together and fold down the cover.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the transport bag and its
contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the
tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the transport bag in the manner
described; otherwise, it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
To store the transport bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the front cover
4. Undo the Velcro fastener and spread out
the transport bag between the front seats.
5. Insert the latch plate of the retaining strap
into the belt buckle under the transport bag.
You can remove the front cover to use the full
height of the through-loading opening. With the
cover folded down, pull the handle, see arrow,
and remove the cover toward the front. To
replace, insert the cover at an angle from above
and let it snap it into place.
6. Load the transport bag. The zipper eases
access to the stored items.
Only place clean skis in the transport bag. Wrap
sharp edges to prevent damage.
You can use the snaps to shorten the transport
bag if you do not need its full length.
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving tips
Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. As a result, some equipment described may not be available in a particular vehicle, for example due to the options or
national-market version selected. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed an engine speed of 4,500 rpm or a
road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Saving fuel
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode.
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
on several factors. You can lower fuel consumption and the environmental impact by taking
certain measures, adjusting your driving style
and having the vehicle serviced regularly.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Remove any unneeded cargo
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually
increased.
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Tires
Remove any mounted parts after you
have finished using them
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof
rack and the rear luggage rack after use.
Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynamics and increase fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass roof
An open glass roof or window causes higher air
resistance and thus increases fuel consumption.
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a
month and before embarking on a long journey,
and correct it if necessary.
Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling
resistance and thus increases fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Set off immediately
Do not let the engine warm up while the car is
still standing, but set off immediately at moderate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the
cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Drive defensively
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking
maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate distance between you and the vehicle in front of
you. A defensive and smooth driving style
keeps fuel consumption down.
Avoid high engine speeds
Only use first gear when setting off. In second
and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation
or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before
reaching high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a constant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and coast to a stop in the highest applicable gear.
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accelerator and coast in a suitable gear.
The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.
Driving tips
Switch off the engine during lengthy
stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy
periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings
or in traffic congestions. You achieve fuel savings even if standing time is as short as approx.
4 seconds.
Switch off functions you do not need at
the moment
Functions such as the air conditioner, seat
heating or rear window defroster draw large
amounts of power and consume additional fuel.
Especially in city traffic and in stop-and-go driving they have a considerable impact. Therefore,
switch these functions off when they are not
really needed.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW
recommends having the vehicle serviced at
your BMW center. Also note the BMW service
system, refer to page 264.
General driving notes
Close the trunk lid
Only drive with the trunk closed. Failure to
do so may endanger passengers or other
road users or may damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident or a braking and evasive
maneuver. In addition, exhaust gas may flow
into the passenger compartment.<
If special circumstances make it absolutely necessary to drive with the trunk open:
1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the automatic climate control system, refer to
page 118.
3. Drive cautiously.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
139
Driving tips
Things to remember when driving
Hot exhaust system
Use the parking brake on inclines
In all vehicles, extremely high temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust system, and never apply undercoating to them.
When driving, standing at idle and while parking, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the
risk of serious personal injuries and property
damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes.
Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.<
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a
lengthy period using the clutch; use the
parking brake instead. Otherwise, greater
clutch wear will result.<
Mobile phones in the vehicle
It is not advisable to use wireless devices
such as mobile phones inside the vehicle
without a direct connection to an external aerial.
Otherwise, it is not possible to exclude the possibility of a reciprocal interference occurring
between the vehicle electronics and the wireless device. Otherwise, there is no assurance
that the radiation generated by the radio transmission will be conveyed out of the passenger
compartment.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road surface. This situation, known as hydroplaning,
means that the tire can completely lose contact
with the road surface, so that neither the car can
be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining tread depth on the tires, refer also to Minimum tread depth on page 256.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
140
For more information about the drive-off assistant, refer to page 100.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most
effective way of braking in situations in which
this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Objects in the movement range of the
pedals
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving.
Do not place additional floor mats onto an existing one or onto other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they have been removed, e.g.
for cleaning.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
Driving tips
Hills
When the vehicle is parked
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
Condensation forms while the automatic climate control is in operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if necessary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system. Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic transmission, refer to page 65.
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch: never drive with the transmission
in neutral or with the engine switched off; otherwise, there will be no engine braking action and
no power assistance to the brakes and steering.
Manual transmission: never drive with the
clutch held down, with the transmission in neutral or with the engine switched off; otherwise,
there will be no engine braking action and no
power assistance to the brakes and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be
impaired.<
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. In some situations,
this can result in sudden loss of tire pressure.<
Make sure that no liquids are spilled or
leak from their containers in the cargo
area, as this could result in damage to the vehicle.<
Determining loading limit
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to
the vehicle and unstable driving conditions
may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
141
Driving tips
Things to remember when driving
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
Coupe
Convertible
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of the occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far forward as possible, ideally directly behind the
respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
Securing cargo
Coupe
Driving tips
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 287; otherwise, excessive loads can
pose a safety hazard and may also place you in
violation of traffic safety laws.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occupants.
Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing
eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure
cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to
page 59; otherwise, these could be damaged.<
Convertible
Coupe: roof-mounted
luggage rack
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Comply with the directions given
in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
> Secure smaller and lighter items using
retaining straps, a cargo area net, or draw
straps.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps for securing larger
and heavier objects are available at your
BMW center. Four lashing eyes are provided for attaching the cargo straps. Two
are located on the side walls of the cargo
area 1, two additional ones are located on
the inside wall of the cargo area 2.
Please note the information supplied with
the cargo straps.
Convertible: before opening the hardtop,
fold down the cargo area partition. Make
sure the cargo area is loaded correctly; otherwise parts of the hardtop can be damaged, refer
to page 130.<
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endanger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerving is necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
The mounting points are located in the roof.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 287.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
143
Driving tips
Things to remember when driving
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure
that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting
the glass roof, and that objects do not project
into the opening path of the trunk lid.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Driving tips
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Navigation
Navigation system
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
The navigation system can determine the precise position of the vehicle, with the aid of satellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide
you to every entered destination.
Enter data only with the vehicle stationary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.<
> Depending on the data volume, a data
update may take several hours.
> Update data while driving to reduce the
drain on the battery.
> Only the main functions of the navigation
system are available during updating.
The update is resumed automatically when a
trip is continued after an interruption.
> You can inquire as to the status of the
update.
> The data are stored in the vehicle.
> After the update, the system restarts.
> The medium that holds the navigation data
can be removed after the update is completed.
Information about navigation data
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version":
Information about the data version is displayed.
Accessing navigation system
Updating the navigation data
1.
Press the button.
2. "Navigation"
The navigation system can also be
accessed directly with the button on the
controller.
Navigation data
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
3. Enter the authorization code of the navigation DVD and change the DVD if needed.
General information
Navigation data and authorization codes are
available from your BMW center. Navigation
data are stored in the vehicle and can be
updated.
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Navigation system
Navigation
Removing navigation DVD
1.
Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
Querying status
1.
Press the button.
2. "Navigation update"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
149
Navigation
Destination entry
Destination entry
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
1.
Press the button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
General information
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 152
> Last destinations, refer to page 153
> Special destinations, refer to page 153
> Entering a destination on the map, refer to
page 155
> Selecting home address, refer to page 153
The system also supports you with the following features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of state/province and
town/city if the current entries should be
retained for your new destination.
> Destination entry via voice, refer to
page 156
Entering a state/province
> Destination entry via BMW Assist, refer to
page 155
2. "Enter address"
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory keys, refer to
page 23.
Entering a destination
manually
1. "Navigation"
3. Select "State/Province" or displayed country.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the displayed town/city.
To make it easier to enter town/city names and
street names, the system assists you with automatic name completion and entry comparison,
refer to page 159. This makes it possible to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored town/city
names and street names can be accessed
quickly.
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Destination entry
2. Select letters, if necessary.
The list is reduced in steps with each entry.
To delete letters:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight street.
3. Select the street.
> To delete individual letters:
Turn the controller to select
then press the controller.
, and
> To delete all letters:
Turn the controller to select
, and
then press the controller for an extended
period.
To enter spaces:
> Select the
Navigation
symbol.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the name of the town/city from the
list.
Alternative: entering street and house
number
1. Select "Street" or displayed street.
2. Enter the street the same way you entered
the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the digits.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
No such street at the destination
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
The desired street is not in the entered town/
city because it belongs to another district of the
town/city.
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
1. "Navigation"
2. Highlight the town/city.
2. "Enter address"
3. Select the town/city.
3. Select "Street" or displayed street.
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the displayed town/city.
2. Select the
symbol.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" displayed country.
All streets of the entered country are
offered. The corresponding town/city is displayed after the street name.
3. Select the digits.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Select an entry.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or displayed street.
2. Enter the street and cross-street the same
way you entered the town/city.
6. Select the letters.
After you enter the street, you can also enter
the cross street or the house number.
7. Change to the list of street names.
If there are several streets with the same name:
9. Select the street.
8. Highlight street.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
151
Navigation
Destination entry
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
Storing a destination in the address
book
1. "Accept destination"
Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination", refer to page 157.
1. "Navigation"
> Setting "Route preference", refer to
page 159.
2. "Map"
> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer
to page 153.
4. Open "Options".
3.
"Guidance"
5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
Address book
To create contacts, refer to page 228.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as
destinations.
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone are not displayed, they first
need to be checked as destinations, refer to
page 218.
6. Select an existing contact, if available.
7. "Business address" or "Home address"
8. "Last name" and "First name" if you wish.
9. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".
3. Select a contact in the list or if so desired,
using the "A-Z search".
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address"
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Destination entry
4. Depending on the selection, select an existing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Navigation
Opening the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
Using the home address as a
destination
The home address must be created. Specifying
a home address, refer to page 228.
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"
1. "Navigation"
Editing a destination
2. "Address book"
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
3. "Home"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
4. "Start guidance"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destinations".
Special destinations
General information
Even with the most up-to-date navigation data,
information about certain special destinations
may have changed; for example, filling stations
may not be in operation.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
153
Navigation
Destination entry
Opening the search for special
destinations
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
1. "Navigation"
10. Select the
2. "Points of Interest"
11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination". Adding destination as another destination, refer to page 180.
The search can be narrowed by entering the
location and type of special destination.
Searching online
1. "Google™ Local Search"
2. Select the special destination.
3. Select the
symbol.
4. "Start guidance"
symbol.
"Start search": without entering a search term,
the search is repeated with the last stored
search term.
Category search
1. "Category search"
2. "Town/City"
Special destination location
3. Select or enter town/city.
As you input the search destination, you can
select from among various options.
4. "Category"
> "At current location"
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible
to select several category details.
Move the controller toward the left to exit
category details.
> "At destination"
> "At different location"
> "Along route"
7. "Start search"
A-Z search
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
1. "A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select or enter town/city.
4. "Category"
8. Select the special destination.
Details are displayed.
If several details are stored, then you can
scroll through the pages.
5. Select category.
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible
to select several category details.
Move the controller toward the left to exit
category details.
7. "Keyword"
8. Enter keyword.
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
9. Select the special destination.
Details are displayed.
If several details are stored, then you can
scroll through the pages.
154
5. Select category.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
9. Select the
symbol.
10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination". Adding destination as another destination, refer to page 180.
Displaying special destinations
List of special destinations: the special destinations are displayed in order of their distance and
are displayed with a direction arrow pointing
toward the destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Destination entry
With the Professional navigation system:
In the Split screen, special destinations from
the selected category are displayed as symbols
in the map view. The display depends on the
map scale and the category.
Navigation
The current position of the vehicle is displayed
on the map.
3.
"Interactive map"
Destination entry via BMW Assist
A connection to the BMW Concierge service is
established, refer to page 229.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the controller.
> To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
5. Press the controller to display additional
menu items.
> Select the
symbol: "Start guidance"
or "Add as another destination".
> "Find points of interest": the search for
special destinations is started.
Specifying the street
If the system cannot recognize a street, it displays one of the following pieces of information:
> A street name in the vicinity.
> The district.
5. Select the settings.
Destination entry via map
If you only know the location of a destination or
street, then you can enter the destination with
the aid of the map.
> The coordinates of the destination.
Interactive map
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. In
addition, pressing the controller makes further
functions available:
Selecting the destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
155
Navigation
Destination entry
> Countries, towns and cities, streets and
intersections can be said as whole words or
spelled in the system language, refer to
page 94.
Example: to enter a destination in a US state
as a complete word, the system language
must be English.
> Spell the entry if the language spoken in the
area is different from the system language.
> Select the
symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
> Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exaggerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
> "Exit interactive map":
Go back to the map view.
> The methods of entry depend on the navigation data in use and on the country and
language settings.
> "View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction"
> "Display destination": the section of the
map around the destination is displayed.
> "Display current location":
The section of the map around the current position is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to
page 153.
Destination entry via voice
General information
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 25.
> During the destination entry by voice, you
can switch between voice entry and entry
via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate
the voice activation system if necessary.
Entering an address in a command
1. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
2. {Enter address}
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the address aloud in the suggested
order.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If necessary, individually name the separate
components of the address, e.g. the town/city.
Entering a town/city
The town/city name can be spoken as a complete word or spelled.
With the destination entry menu displayed:
1. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
2. {City} or {Spell city}.
> Having the possible spoken commands
read aloud: {Voice commands}
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
Saying the entries
4. Say the name of the town/city or say at least
the first three letters.
> With the Professional navigation system:
City/town, street, and house number can be
entered with a single command.
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Destination entry
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cities may be suggested.
5. Select a location:
> To select a recommended town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {New
entry}
Navigation
Planning a trip with
intermediate destinations
New trip
A trip can be planned using intermediate destinations.
1. "Navigation"
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry …}
2. "Map"
> To spell an entry: {Spell city}
3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
4.
"Guidance"
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry.
Towns/cities that sound the same are compiled
in a separate list and are displayed as one town/
city followed by three dots.
1. Select an entry:
{Yes} or {Entry …} e.g. entry 2.
2. Select the desired town/city.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive: turn the controller until the town/city
is selected and press the controller.
Entering a street or intersection
The street or intersection is entered in the same
manner as the town/city.
7. Enter the intermediate destination.
8. "Start guidance"
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
Entering a house number
1. "Enter new destination"
Depending on the data in the navigation system, house numbers up to the number 2,000
can be entered:
2. Select the type of destination entry.
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
Say each digit separately.
3. Continue making the entry as prompted
by the system.
Starting destination guidance
{Start guidance}
Destination guidance starts immediately.
3. Enter the intermediate destination.
4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is inserted
into the destination list and highlighted.
5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
destination is at the desired place in the list.
6. Press the controller.
Starting the trip
After entering all intermediate destinations,
highlight the first destination and say "Start
guidance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
157
Navigation
Destination entry
For example if the second destination is highlighted at the start of route guidance, then the
first destination is skipped over.
The
symbol indicates the active intermediate destination.
Options for intermediate destinations
1. "Map"
2.
"Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
Storing a trip
> "Edit destination"
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list.
Delete existing trips as necessary to permit you
to store new trips.
> "Reposition dest. in the trip": move the
intermediate destination within the list.
> "Delete dest. in the trip"
1. Open "Options".
> "Go to next dest. in the trip"
2. "Store trip"
Some options are not possible for some trips.
3. Enter a name.
4. "OK"
Deleting a stored trip
The trip is stored in the trip list under the
entered name.
1. "Navigation"
Selecting a stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
Selecting last trip
4. "Start guidance"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
Trips, changing
3. "Last trip"
Changing the trip direction
4.
"Start guidance"
Intermediate destinations are displayed in
reverse order in the list.
1. "Map"
2.
"Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Destination guidance
Navigation
Destination guidance
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Starting destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. Entering a destination, refer to page 150.
3. "Accept destination"
Route criteria
General information
> You can influence the calculated route by
selecting certain trip criteria.
> Route criteria can be changed during destination entry and during route guidance.
> Street types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into account in route planning, e.g. avoiding highways.
> The proposed route can differ from personal experience.
> The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
4. "Start guidance"
> Route guidance with traffic bulletins, refer
to page 165.
The route is displayed on the Control Display
after it is calculated.
Changing route criteria
In the map view, the distance to the destination/
intermediate destination and the estimated
time of arrival are displayed.
The arrow display appears on the Control Display, if so desired.
Terminating destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.
"Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:
>
"Fast route": time-optimized route
through a combination of the least possible distance and stretches of road that
allow rapid driving.
>
"ECO PRO route": optimized combination of the fastest and shortest possible route.
>
"Short route": short distance without
taking time into account.
2. "Map"
3.
"Guidance".
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination
guidance
> "Alternative routes": are suggested,
where possible, during active route
guidance.
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
159
Navigation
Destination guidance
The individual suggestions are labeled in
color.
> Traffic bulletins.
> Distance to the next change of direction.
> Street name of the next change of direction.
Lane information
In the arrow display, the recommended lanes of
multi-lane roads are each marked with a triangle.
> Filled triangle: optimum lane.
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
> "Avoid highways": highways are avoided
where possible.
> "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
where possible.
> "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible.
The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.
Route
> Empty triangle: likewise possible lane. It
can, however, also be possible to briefly
make additional lane changes.
Displaying the list of route segments
If the route guidance has been started, then you
can display a list of route segments. The distance to be traveled and traffic bulletins are displayed for each segment of the route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight the route segment.
The route segment is displayed in the preview
map.
Bypassing a section of the route
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, various views of the route are available during route
guidance:
> Arrow display on the Control Display.
> List of route segments.
> Map view, refer to page 162.
During route guidance, prompt the navigation
system to bypass certain route segments. In
doing so, you will specify how many kilometers
to travel before returning to the original route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for"
Arrow display
The following information is displayed during
route guidance:
> Large arrow: current direction of travel.
> Small arrow: indicates the next change of
direction.
> Intersection view.
> Lane information.
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Destination guidance
4. Turn the controller: enter the desired mileage.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for"
Navigation
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during destination guidance.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.
"Voice instructions"
4. "Remove blocking"
For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a
programmable memory key, refer to page 23.
Gas station recommendations
Repeating a voice instruction
The remaining range is calculated and filling
stations along the route are displayed.
1. "Navigation"
Even with the most up-to-date navigation data,
information about certain special destinations
may have changed; for example, filling stations
may not be in operation.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of filling stations is displayed.
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the
symbol.
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the
symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if
necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
6. "Start guidance": route guidance to the
selected filling station is started.
"Add as another destination": the filling station is incorporated into the route.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
161
Navigation
Destination guidance
Map view
Displaying the map view
> Gray road sign: the obstruction does not
relate to the planned route or direction of
travel.
1. "Navigation"
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 163.
2. "Map"
Planned route
After route guidance is started, the planned
route is displayed on the map.
Overview
Status boxes
Show/hide: press the controller.
> Upper status box: time, phone details, and
entertainment details.
> Lower status box: symbol for active route
guidance, traffic bulletin status, arrival time,
and distance from destination.
1
Toolbar
2
Route segment with traffic obstruction
3
Road sign for traffic obstruction
4
Planned route
5
Current location
6
Upper status box
7
Lower status box
The following functions are available directly in
the map view:
Symbol
Function
Starting/stopping destination
guidance
Switching voice instructions on/
off
Lines on the map
Streets and roads are depicted with different
colors and lines according to their classification.
Dotted lines represent railroad and ferry connections. National borders are depicted with
thin lines.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route identify
route segments with traffic obstructions,
depending on map scale. The direction of the
triangles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
Road signs classify the obstructions.
> Red road sign: the obstruction relates to the
planned route or direction of travel.
162
Toolbar
Changing route criteria or
selecting route alternatives
Special destinations
Displaying traffic bulletins
Interactive map
Map view settings
Changing scale
Changing the map section
"Interactive map"
> To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the controller in the required direction and turn it.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Destination guidance
Navigation
Changing scale
4. Select "Split screen content" or scale.
1. Select the
5. Select the map view:
symbol.
2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the
map scale.
The map shows the entire range from your location to the destination.
Settings for the map view
The map is shown on the Control Display.
> "Arrow display"
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Map view with perspective"
> "Position"
> "Exit ramp view"
> "Traffic conditions/gray map"
6. To change the scale: switch to the Split
screen and turn the controller.
1. Open "Options".
Traffic bulletins
2. "Settings"
Set the optimized map view.
> "Day/night mode"
Select and adjust depending on light conditions.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
Settings are not taken into account.
> "Satellite images"
Depending on the availability and resolution, satellite images are displayed in scales
of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
1,000 km.
> "Perspective view in 3D"
Displays a three-dimensional view. Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are displayed on the map in 3D.
> "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
bulletins. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.
Map view for the Split screen display
The map view for the Split screen can be
selected separately from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the Split screen content is selected.
Overview
> You can display the traffic bulletins from
radio stations that broadcast the TMC
(Traffic Message Channel) of a traffic information service. Bulletins about traffic
obstructions and hazards are continuously
updated.
> Traffic bulletins are indicated by symbols on
the map.
> Traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are
stored in a list.
The symbol in the toolbar of the map view
turns red if a traffic bulletin relates to the calculated route.
Real Time Traffic Information End-User
Provisions
Certain BMW models equipped with navigation
have the capability to display real-time traffic
information. If your system has this capability
the following additional terms and conditions
apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right to
use the Traffic Data in the event that the EndUser is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
163
Navigation
Destination guidance
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Network") holds the rights to the traffic incident
data and RDS-TMC network through which it is
delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or
use any other method to reproduce, duplicate,
republish, transmit or distribute in any way any
portion of traffic incident data. You agree to
indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of
North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates)
against any and all claims, damages, costs or
other expenses that arise directly or indirectly
out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic
incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your
violation of this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection
herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informational only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers
make no representations about content, traffic
and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network,
including, but not limited to, any and all third
party providers of any of the licensed material,
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties or representations
with respect to the licensed material (including,
without limitation, that the licensed material will
be error-free, will operate without interruption
or that the traffic data will be accurate), express,
implied or statutory, including, without limitation, the implied warranties of merchantability,
non-infringement fitness for a particular purpose, or those arising from a course of dealing
or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental
damages (including, without limitation, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating
to the same) arising from any claim relating
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or
164
BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
including, without limitation, claims in contract
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so those particular limitations may not apply to you.
Activating/deactivating reception
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Accessing traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.
"Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins for the calculated
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order
of their distance from the current vehicle
position.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
"More information":
Display additional information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
if desired.
Traffic bulletins on the map
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the Control Display changes to a grayscale display. This
enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The
day/night mode is disregarded in this setting.
Symbols or special destinations are no longer
displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Destination guidance
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the
location of the traffic obstruction along the
route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions
are displayed.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruction's length, direction and impact are displayed
on the map using triangles or gray bars along
the calculated route.
> Red: traffic congestion
> Orange: stop-and-go traffic
> Yellow: heavy traffic
> Green: clear roads
> Gray: general traffic information, e.g. construction zone
The bulletins displayed depend in the respective traffic information service.
Navigation
> Traffic bulletins that lie on the route are
always shown.
> For your personal safety, it is not possible to
hide traffic bulletins that announce a potential hazard.
Route guidance with traffic bulletins
Semi-dynamic route guidance
With traffic bulletin reception switched on,
semi-dynamic route guidance is active.
The system takes into account the existing traffic bulletins during route guidance. A message
is displayed as a function of the route, the traffic
bulletins, and the possible alternate routes. The
message displays the traffic bulletin and in the
event of a traffic obstruction, suggests an alternate route if possible. The difference in distance and time between the original route and
the alternate route are also displayed.
Taking an alternate route:
Filtering traffic bulletins
Set which traffic bulletins are displayed on the
map.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired categories.
"Detour"
With particular hazards, e.g. objects on the
roadway, a message is displayed without a possible alternate route.
It is also possible to take alternate routes can
also be taken if the traffic reports are accessed
via the list:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.
"Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5.
"Detour"
Traffic bulletins from the selected categories
are displayed on the map.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
165
Navigation
Destination guidance
Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
> The system does not point out traffic
obstructions along the original route.
> Traffic bulletins will continue to be displayed on the map.
> Depending on the type of road and the
nature and length of the traffic obstruction,
the route can also be calculated so that you
travel through the traffic obstruction.
> Certain hazards are displayed regardless of
the setting.
To activate dynamic route guidance:
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
What to do if …
Navigation
What to do if …
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during destination
guidance?
The area has not been fully recorded yet, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new route suggestion.
What to do if…
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position.
Reception is generally available when you
are in the open.
> The destination guidance does not accept a
destination without a street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and
start destination guidance.
> The destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Choose a destination as
close as possible to the original one.
> The letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> The map view is displayed in grayscale?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
Control Display changes to a grayscale display. This enables a better view of the traffic
bulletins.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Entertainment
On/off and tone
On/off and tone
Vehicle equipment
Buttons near the CD/DVD player
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
The following audio and video sources share
the same control elements and adjustments:
1
Sound output for entertainment on/off, volume
> CD/DVD player
> Press: switch on/off
When you switch on the unit, the last set
radio station or track is played.
> CD changer
> Turn: adjusting the volume
> Radio
> Video
2
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player
3
CD/DVD drive
4
FM/AM: change the radio station waveband
5
MODE: change the audio and video
sources
Controls
The audio and video sources can be controlled
using the:
> Buttons near the CD/DVD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 23
> Voice activation system
6
Eject the CD/DVD
Station scan/track search
> Change the radio station
> Select the track for the CD/DVD player,
CD changer and certain multimedia
devices
Switching on/off
To switch the entertainment audio output on or
off:
Press knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates
that sound output is switched off.
The sound output is available for approx.
20 minutes after the ignition was switched off.
For sound output, switch the unit back on.
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
On/off and tone
Adjusting volume
Entertainment
3. Select the desired tone setting.
Turn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the
desired volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Setting tone controls
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
Treble, bass, balance, fader
2. "Tone"
> "Treble": treble adjustment.
3. "Equalizer"
> "Bass": bass adjustment.
4. Select the desired setting.
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
171
Entertainment
On/off and tone
Multi-channel playback, surround
Adjustments
You can choose between stereo and multichannel playback, surround.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
3. "Volume settings"
2. "Tone"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
2. "Tone"
3. "L7 Surround"
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
When surround is activated, multi-channel
playback is simulated when playing an audio
track in stereo.
6. To store: press the controller.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
Volume
2. "Tone"
> "Speed volume": volume is adapted
depending on the speed
3. "Reset"
Resetting tone settings
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
> "PDC": volume of the PDC acoustic signal
relative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the acoustic signal, e.g.
for the acoustic Safety Belt Reminder relative to the entertainment sound output
> "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone conversation.
> "Loudspeak.": volume of the speaker during a phone conversation.
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Radio
Entertainment
Radio
Vehicle equipment
1. "Radio"
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
General information
Your radio is designed for reception of the following stations:
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
> FM and AM
> HD Radio
> Satellite radio
Selecting a station
The selected station is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Changing stations
Turn the controller and press it
or
Press the knob if the sound output is switched
off.
press the
direction
button for the corresponding
or
press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
173
Entertainment
Radio
4. Select the frequency: turn the controller.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a station on the programmable
memory keys, refer to page 23.
1. Select a station.
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
Renaming a radio station
An FM station with changing station names can
be renamed.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename to:"
If necessary, wait until the desired name
appears.
The selected station name is added to the list of
current stations and stored stations.
2.
...
button.
Press and hold the desired
RDS – Radio Data System
In the FM waveband, additional information is
transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. If the reception is weak or disrupted, it can take some time before the station
names are displayed.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Radio
HD Radio™ reception
Many radio stations transmit analog and digital
signals.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under
U.S. and Foreign Patents licensed from iBiquity
Digital Corp. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Entertainment
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
When reception is poor, the substation is muted
for several seconds.
Presets
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
1. "Radio"
Storing stations
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
The station currently selected is stored.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
2. "Presets"
1. "Radio"
3. "Store station"
When setting a station that has a digital signal, it
may take several seconds before the station
plays in HD quality.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, playback switches
between analog and digital reception. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the
artist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
The symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. The station names of the substations end in HD2, HD3,
etc.
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
You can also store the stations on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 23.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
175
Entertainment
Satellite radio
Satellite radio
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Activating channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Category"
General information
The channels are offered in fixed packages.
Packages must be activated by telephone.
Navigation bar
Symbol
Function
Changing list view
Selecting category
Entering channel directly
Time shift
Accessing favorites, selecting
the My Favorites category
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels category.
5. Select desired channel.
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Dial the telephone number to have the
channels activated.
Managing favorites
Traffic Jump
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
also be stored on the programmable memory
buttons, refer to page 23.
Managing subscription
This telephone number can also be used to
deactivate the channels.
Clear reception is required for activating and
deactivating channels. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky. The
channel name is displayed in the status line.
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Satellite radio
Deactivating channels
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
Entertainment
Via the button in the area of the
CD/DVD player
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction.
The next channel is selected.
Using direct channel entry
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Set channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
5. Call Sirius to deactivate the channels.
Storing channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or a desired category.
Selecting channels
4. Select desired channel.
You can only listen to activated channels.
6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
5. Press the controller again.
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired category.
4. Select desired channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
You can also store the channels on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 23.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
177
Entertainment
Satellite radio
Changing list view
The list view changes each time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information about the channel is displayed.
Symbol
Function
Channel name
Artist
> The red arrow indicates the current playback position.
Track
Selecting category
> The time difference from the live broadcast
is displayed next to the cache memory bar.
1. "Radio"
> For live transmissions: "live".
2. "Satellite radio"
Time shift menu
3.
"Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Symbol
Function
Go to live broadcast
Playback/pause
Time shift
Next track
Approximately one hour of the channel currently being listened to is temporarily stored in a
cache memory. Prerequisite: the signal must be
available.
Previous track
The stored audio track can be played back at a
different time from the live broadcast. If the
cache memory is full, then the older tracks are
recorded over. The cache memory is deleted if
a new channel is selected.
Automatic time shift deactivated/
activated
Accessing Time shift
1. "Radio"
Reverse
Automatic time shift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
> Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
> Activation of the voice activation system.
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
Fast forward
"Replay - Time shift"
> Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
Activating
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
178
3.
"Replay - Time shift"
4.
"Automatic time shift"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Satellite radio
Entertainment
Accessing favorites
Deactivating
"Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Possible favorites include artist, track,
game, league, and team.
If an activated favorite is being played, the message "Favorite alert!" appears for approx.
20 seconds.
Select
"Favorites" while the alert message
is being displayed.
Storing artist, track, or game
Only current broadcasts can be stored as favorites. The channel information must be available.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired category.
4. Select desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select artist, track, or game.
The displayed favorite will be played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
the My Favorites category. All of the favorites
currently being broadcast can be selected from
a list.
Storing league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
Managing favorites
1. "Radio"
Activating/deactivating favorites
2. "Satellite radio"
Favorites can be activated or deactivated globally and individually.
3.
"Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
1. "Satellite radio"
2.
"Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2.
5. Select the desired league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.
"Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the favorites you wish to delete.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
179
Entertainment
Satellite radio
Traffic Jump
Notes
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region are broadcast at intervals of a few minutes.
> Under some circumstances, reception may
not be possible, e.g. under certain environmental or topographical conditions. The
satellite radio has no influence on this.
Selecting region
> The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages or near trees, mountains, or other powerful sources of radio
interference.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Activating/deactivating Jump
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Jump to:"
As soon as information about the selected
region becomes available, it is broadcast.
A new panel appears in the display.
Cancel Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol
Meaning
Information will be broadcast
soon.
Information is currently being
broadcast.
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius carries out an update
of the names and positions of the channels. The
update occurs automatically and can take several minutes.
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
Entertainment
CD/DVD player and CD changer
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
CD/DVD playback
CD changer
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
Starting playback
Via iDrive
Fill the CD/DVD magazine and insert it, refer to
page 185.
To start playback when a CD/DVD is already in
the player or changer:
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD:
Inserting a CD/DVD
Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing up. The CD/DVD is drawn in
automatically.
Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. For CDs/DVDs with compressed
audio files, it can take several minutes to read in
the data, depending on the directory structure.
Ejecting a CD/DVD
Press the button next to the CD/DVD player.
The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
Symbol
Meaning
Playable formats
CD/DVD player
CD/DVD player
CD changer
> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVDRW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD, SVCD
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC,
M4A
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
181
Entertainment
CD/DVD player and CD changer
Audio playback
5. Select a track and press the controller.
Selecting the track using the button
Press the
button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until the desired
track is reached.
Selecting a track using iDrive
Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Displaying information about the track
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
4. Select the desired track to begin playback.
> Artist
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
> Album title
Depending on the data, some letters and numbers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed correctly.
> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Random sequence playback, Random
2. "CD/DVD"
The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played
once in random sequence.
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
> Track file name
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
Entertainment
Starting playback
5. "Random"
For your own safety, the video image is only displayed up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some
market-specific versions, only with the parking
brake engaged or the selector lever of the automatic transmission is in the park position.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all the
tracks in the selected directory are played in
random order.
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4.
"DVD menu"
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed or the ignition is switched off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the
sponding direction.
button for the corre-
Automatic replay
Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are
repeated automatically.
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
VCD/SVCD
Video playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Country codes
3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the information
on your DVD.
4.
Code
Region
1
USA, Canada
2
Japan, Europe, Middle East, South
Africa
3
Southeast Asia
4
Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand
5
Northwest Asia, North Africa
6
China
0
All regions
2. "CD/DVD"
"Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
The CD/DVD is started.
Video menu
To open the Video menu:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
183
Entertainment
CD/DVD player and CD changer
The Video menu is displayed:
Symbol
3. "Audio/language"
Function
Open the DVD menu
Starting playback
Pause
Stop
Next chapter/next track
Previous chapter/previous
track
Fast forward
4. Select the desired language.
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
Reverse
Subtitles
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.
Subtitles can be selected if they are contained
on the DVD.
DVD menu
2. Open "Options".
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
Video menu.
3. "Subtitles"
2.
"DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
4. Select the desired language or "Do not display subtitles".
> To select menu items: move and press the
controller.
> To change to the Video menu: turn the controller and select "Back".
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; also refer to the information on
your DVD.
Brightness, contrast, color
Language
2. Open "Options".
1. Turn the controller during playback.
3. "Display settings"
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
Entertainment
Camera angle
The camera angle depends on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed, and then press the controller.
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
Zoom
Display the video image on the full screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
CD changer
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the
left side panel in the cargo area.
4. "Zoom mode"
Coupe
Selecting track
Convertible
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1.
"Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
185
Entertainment
CD/DVD player and CD changer
Removing the CD magazine
Inserting the CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine,
you must first remove it from the CD changer:
Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direction of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.
1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
The CD magazine is ejected.
Push the magazine back in after at least
2 seconds have passed so that the inserted
CDs can be read in again.
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD
magazine
When loading CDs into or removing them from
the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and
do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
Inserting CDs:
Insert one CD per compartment with the
labeled side up.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired compartment and take out
the CD.
186
The CD changer automatically reads in the
loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged;
otherwise, severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat build-up and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter might jam and no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus;
otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
Entertainment
Humidity
DTS Digital Surround™
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Manufactured under license of US
patent numbers: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other patents granted and pending in both the
USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and
the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. ©
DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this may be due to one of the following
reasons.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with selfrecorded CDs/DVDs are, for example, inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen
designed for this purpose.
Damage
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust,
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
above 1227/506, nor to high humidity levels
or direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered U.S. patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers.
The use of this copy protection must be
approved by Macrovision. Unless otherwise
agreed with Macrovision, media with this protection may only be used for private purposes.
Copying of this technology is prohibited.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
187
Entertainment
Music collection
Music collection
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Storing music
The music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB
devices can be stored in the music collection in
the vehicle and played from there.
> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a compressed audio format when they are stored.
If available, information on the album, such
as the artist, is stored as well.
> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/
DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album. After storing, the tracks and
directories can be deleted individually. Files
are only stored in the WMA, MP3, M4A, and
AAC formats.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored in the vehicle but cannot be played
back.
tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
5.987.525, 6.061.680, 6.154.773, 6.161.132,
6.230.192, 6.230.207, 6.240.459 and
6.330.593 as well as other granted or pending
patents. Some services supplied under license
from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:
6.304.523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and
logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote"
logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Storing files from CDs/DVDs
CDs/DVDs can only be stored from the CD/DVD
player.
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the
player.
symbol for the CD/DVD
5. "Store in vehicle"
Regularly back up the music data; otherwise, it could be lost if there is a fault on
the hard disc.<
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry standard in music recognition technology and
related content delivery. For more information,
please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2009
Gracenote. This product and service may prac-
188
The music collection is displayed.
The tracks are stored and played back in
sequence from the music collection.
Observe the following during the storage process:
Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and
do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD
player; otherwise, the storage process will be
interrupted.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Music collection
You can switch to the other audio sources without interrupting the storage process. Tracks
from the current CD/DVD can also be called up,
if they have been stored already.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Entertainment
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be connected to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
> Suitable devices: USB mass storage
devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3
players with a USB interface.
> Unsuitable devices: USB hard drive, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with multiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone.
Music from Apple iPods/iPhones can be
played via the USB audio interface in the
center armrest.
3. "Storing..."
> File systems: popular file systems for USB
devices are supported. The format FAT 32
is recommended.
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Music from a USB device can be stored
only via the USB interface in the glove
compartment.<
1. Connect the USB device to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
Continuing the storage process
3. "Music collection"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. Open "Options".
2. "CD/DVD"
5. "Music data import/export"
3. Select the
player.
symbol for the CD/DVD
6. "Import music (USB)"
4. "Continue storing"
The storing of the CD/DVD continues at the
beginning of the track at which storing was
interrupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this information is available in the vehicle database or on
the CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
189
Entertainment
Music collection
Playing music
7. "Start play"
The list of tracks is automatically repeated.
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album.
Restarting the music search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 25.
3. "Music search"
1. Press the
"New search"
Music search by voice
button on the steering wheel.
2. {Music search}
3. Open the desired category, e.g. {Select
artist}.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
To select a track directly:
{Title …}
4. Select the desired category.
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in one command.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search or the album selected last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"
5. To select the desired entry:
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired input
or
> select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
190
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Music collection
Top 50
Entertainment
4. "Random"
List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates. Symbols indicate the format.
Symbol
Format
Audio CD
Managing music
Albums
Compressed audio files
Renaming an album
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
The name of the album, if available, is automatically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown, it can be changed later.
An album cannot be renamed while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if
possible.
4. To select tracks, change directories if
needed. To go up one level in the directory,
move the controller to the left.
Random sequence playback, Random
6. Select the letters individually.
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
191
Entertainment
Music collection
Deleting an album
1. Start the engine.
An album cannot be deleted while a track from it
is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. Connect the USB medium to the USB interface in the glove compartment, refer to
page 126.
2. "Music collection"
3. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
6. "Music data import/export"
Deleting a track and directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
it is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
7. "Backup music on USB"
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Restoring the music collection in the
vehicle
Music collection
When storing from the USB device, the
music collection existing in the vehicle is
replaced.<
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB medium. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup during a long trip.
192
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Music collection
Entertainment
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
193
Entertainment
External devices
External devices
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
Symbol
Meaning
The AUX-In connection is in the center armrest.
AUX-In connection
Connect the headphone connection or line-out
connection of the device to the jack plug.
USB audio interface
Mobile phone audio interface
Playback
Bluetooth audio
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on, and
using the audio device, select a track.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
AUX-IN port
3. "External devices" if applicable
4.
Overview
> It is possible to connect audio devices, e.g.
MP3 players. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
"AUX front"
Sound is output over the vehicle speakers
Volume
> Recommended settings: mid-level tone and
volume settings on the audio device. Tone
may depend on the quality of the audio files.
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
Connecting
Adjusting volume
Lift up the center armrest.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices" if applicable
3.
194
"AUX front"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
External devices
Entertainment
Audio files
4. "Volume"
Playback of standard audio files is possible:
> MP3
> WMA
> WAV (PCM)
> AAC, M4A
> Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and then press the controller.
Connection via the USB audio
interface.
Lift up the center armrest.
USB audio interface/mobile
phone audio interface
Overview
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
Options for connecting external
devices
> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3 player,
USB flash drive, or mobile phones that are
supported by the USB audio interface.
> Connection via the snap-in adapter, when
equipped with extended connectivity of the
music player in the mobile phone: Apple
iPhone or mobile phones. Playback may
only be possible when no device is connected to the AUX-IN port.
Because of the large number of audio devices
available on the market, an operation via the
vehicle cannot be guaranteed for every audio
device/mobile phone.
Ask your BMW center for suitable audio
devices/mobile phones.
File systems
Popular file systems for USB devices are supported. The format FAT 32 is recommended.
1
AUX-IN port for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2
USB interface
Apple iPod/iPhone
Use a flexible adapter cable for the connection.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB
interface 2.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is supported by the USB audio interface.
USB device
To protect the USB interface and USB device
from mechanical damage, connect them with a
flexible adapter cable.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface 2.
After initial connection
Information about all tracks, e.g. artist or music
style and the playlists are imported into the
vehicle. It can take some time, depending on
the USB device and the number of tracks.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
195
Entertainment
External devices
During transmission, the tracks can be
accessed via the file directory.
Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
Number of tracks
The data from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the vehicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than
36,000 tracks are stored, then the data of existing tracks may be deleted.
3. Select the or
4.
5. Select desired category, e.g. "Genre", "Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired input. When a letter is entered,
the results are filtered using this letter as
the first letter. If multiple letters are
entered, all results that contain that
sequence are displayed.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights
Management (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
> Select the desired entry from the list.
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or
symbol.
"Search"
symbol.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.
Playback begins with the first track.
The CD cover that belongs to the track appears
on the Control Display, possibly after a few seconds.
7. "Start play"
Track search
Selection is possible via:
Restarting a track search
> Playback lists
"New search"
> Information: music style, artist; if applicable,
composer, album, track.
Playback lists
> Additionally for USB devices: file directory;
if applicable, composer.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Track titles are displayed if they have been
stored in the Latin alphabet.
To open playback lists.
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or
4.
196
symbol.
"Playlists"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
External devices
Current playback
Video menu
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Symbol
4.
Previous video file
symbol.
It may be necessary to click the
symbol twice in order to play the
previous video file.
"Current playback"
Random play sequence
The current list of tracks is played in random
sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
Fast forward/reverse
button.
Video playback
Overview
Video playback possible via snap-in adapter.
They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
Playback
For your own safety, the video image is only displayed up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some
market-specific versions, only with the parking
brake engaged or the selector lever of the automatic transmission is in the park position.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the
4.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme
environmental conditions, e.g. very high temperatures, refer to the operating instructions of
the audio device.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s,
proper playback cannot always be ensured.
4. "Random"
Press and hold the
Format
Next video file
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or
Entertainment
symbol.
"Video"
5. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
6. Select the desired video file to begin playback.
Information on connection
> The connected audio device is supplied
with a max. power of 500 mA if supported
by the device. For this reason, do not connect the device to a charging socket in the
vehicle; otherwise, it may not be possible to
ensure proper playback.
> Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard drives.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
recharge external devices.
Bluetooth audio
Overview
> It is possible to use Bluetooth to play music
files from external devices, e.g. audio
devices or mobile phones.
Using a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 195.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
197
Entertainment
External devices
> Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.
> Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
> The volume of the sound output depends
on the device. If necessary, change the volume setting on the device.
> Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Requirements
> Suitable device. For information, go to
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
> Device operational.
> Ignition switched on.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 205, and in the device.
> Activating Bluetooth audio, refer to
page 205.
> Bluetooth presets in the device are
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the
device.
5. To perform other operations on the device,
refer to the owner's manual for the device:
e.g. search for and connect Bluetooth
device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device's display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the device's display.
You will be prompted by iDrive or the device
to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the Bluetooth passkey. Only required once for pairing.
Pairing and connecting
Only pair the device when the vehicle is
stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead
to endangerment of passengers or other road
users.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
8. Select desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
9. "OK"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
If the pairing was successful, the device is displayed as connected.
4. "Add new phone"
symbol displayed in white: device is active
as an audio source.
If the pairing was not successful: what to do if…,
refer to page 200.
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
External devices
Connecting a particular device
Playback
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
General information
Entertainment
Connection is not possible if a data exchange is
currently taking place via a mobile phone that is
connected via Bluetooth.
> The display of track information depends on
the device.
Prerequisite
> Playback is interrupted if a data exchange is
taking place with a mobile phone that is
connected via Bluetooth.
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired
devices.
> Operation via the device or iDrive are both
possible.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Starting playback
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
1. Connect device.
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
2. "CD/Multimedia"
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
3. "External devices"
4. Select the
symbol.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"
Connecting a device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
5. Select the desired title from the list.
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
Playback menu
Depending on the device, all functions may not
be available.
Symbol
Function
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol.
Previous track
symbol displayed in white: device is active
as an audio source.
Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
199
Entertainment
External devices
Disconnecting an audio connection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. Select the desired device from the list of
connected devices.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. "Audio"
7. "OK"
With a mobile phone, only the audio connection
is disconnected. All other connections remain
active.
Unpairing device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Highlight the device to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or to the vehicle? If necessary,
delete the connections with other devices.
Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a
charging cable.
Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
Is the device no longer responding? Switch
the device off and back on again.
Repeat the pairing procedure.
> No music can be played.
Start the program for playing music files on
the device and if necessary, select a track
via the device.
Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
the radio control panel.
> Music files only play quietly.
Adjust volume settings on the device.
> Playback is interrupted by the press of a
button or other messages on the device.
Switch off key tones and other acoustic signal on the device.
What to do if…
Information about suitable devices is available
at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 204.
> Device not supported by vehicle.
If necessary, perform a software update,
refer to page 201.
> Device could not be paired or connected.
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and vehicle match? Enter the same passkey
on the device and via iDrive.
200
> Playback is interrupted by a phone call or
traffic report and does not automatically
continue.
Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
the radio control panel.
> Playback is not possible when the mobile
phone is connected via Bluetooth audio and
at the same time via the extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile
phone.
Disconnect one of the two connections, e.g.
the audio connection, refer to page 200,
and start playback again.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
External devices
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function, please
contact Customer Relations or your BMW center.
Entertainment
5. "Update software"
Software update
The vehicle supports various external devices,
depending on the software it is currently using.
A software update can enable the vehicle to
support, for example, new mobile phones or
new external devices.
Software updates and associated, up-to-date
instructions are available on the web page
www.bmwusa.com/update.
6. "USB" if applicable
7. "Start update"
8. "OK"
All of the listed software updates are installed.
Displaying current version
Restoring to previous version
The currently installed software is displayed.
If necessary, it is possible to restore the system
to the software version prior to the last software
update.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Show current version"
The restoring to the previous version can only
be performed when stopped.
Select the desired version to display additional
information.
1. "Settings"
Updating software by USB
3. "Restore previous version"
The software update can only be performed
when stopped.
4. Select "OK" twice.
1. Save the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB data storage
device.
2. Connect the USB data storage device to the
USB interface of the USB audio interface in
the center armrest. It is not possible to perform the update using the USB interface in
the glove compartment.
2. "Software update"
All of the listed software updates are removed.
Note
BMW Assist, Office functions, and connected
devices may be temporarily unavailable during a
software update or while restoring to the previous version. Wait a few minutes until the functions are available once more.
3. "Settings"
4. "Software update"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter describes how to use
the telephone, BMW Assist and
BMW TeleServices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Communications
Telephone
Telephone
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter makes it possible:
> Accommodate the mobile phone.
> Recharge its battery.
> Connect it to an external antenna of the
vehicle.
This assures a better network connection
and constant sound quality.
Suitable mobile phones
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices, e.g.
audio players, can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
After being paired once, when the ignition is
switched on, these devices are automatically
detected as soon as they are present in the
vehicle and can be controlled via iDrive, by the
buttons on the steering wheel, and by voice.
Depending on whether they are functioning as a
telephone and/or as an audio source, external
devices can be used via the vehicle. The telephone functions will be described below. Operation of audio functions, refer to page 197.
For precise information about which mobile
phones and external devices with a Bluetooth
interface are supported by the mobile phone
preparation, go to www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Displaying vehicle identification
number and software part number
Checking which mobile phones are supported
by the mobile phone preparation requires the
vehicle identification number and software part
number. The software version of the mobile
phone may also be required.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
Up to four external devices can be paired.
4. "Display system information"
It may be necessary for some functions to be
activated by the mobile phone provider or service provider.
With a certain software version, these suitable
mobile phones support the vehicle functions
described below.
Only make entries when traffic conditions
permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in
your hand while you are driving; use the handsfree system instead. Otherwise, you may
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
With other mobile phones or software versions,
malfunctions may occur.
204
A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle
should not be operated via the mobile phone
keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
It is possible to perform a software update, refer
to page 201.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Telephone
Notes
1. "Telephone"
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and some
functions may no longer be carried out.
2. Open "Options".
Communications
3. "Bluetooth®"
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
follow the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Pairing/unpairing mobile
phone
General information
The following functions are available:
> Using a mobile phone as a telephone.
> Using the mobile phone as an auxiliary
phone.
> Using the mobile phone as an audio source.
> Using an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 197.
Requirements
Additional functions
Auxiliary phone
A mobile phone can be used as an auxiliary
phone.
Incoming calls to the auxiliary phone can be
accepted, refer to page 209. Missed calls to the
auxiliary phone are shown in the Control Display.
> Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 204.
Office
> Mobile phone operational.
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text
messages, and e-mails are imported from the
mobile phone into the vehicle.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 207, and in the mobile phone.
> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the
mobile phone.
> Deactivating Bluetooth audio, refer to
page 205.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the Bluetooth passkey. Only required once for pairing.
> Ignition switched on.
Audio source
A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.
Activating/deactivating additional
functions
To use these functions in the vehicle, activate
them before pairing. For information on suitable
mobile phones that support these functions,
refer to page 204.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
3. Open "Options".
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
205
Communications
Telephone
5. Select the desired additional function:
6. Enter the passkey and confirm.
> "Additional telephone"
> "Office"
> "Bluetooth® audio"
If an additional function is deactivated, it cannot
be assigned to a phone.
Pairing and connecting a device
Only pair the device when the vehicle is
stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead
to endangerment of passengers or other road
users.<
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
1. "Telephone"
8. "OK"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of devices.
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.
Functions supported by the mobile phone and
audio device are displayed as symbols during
the pairing.
White symbol: function active.
Gray symbol: function inactive.
Symbol
Function
Telephone
Auxiliary phone
Audio source
4. To perform other operations on the mobile
phone, refer to the owner's manual for the
device: e.g. search for and connect Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
You will be prompted by iDrive or the mobile
phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
Four devices can be paired with the vehicle
simultaneously. Three devices can be connected to the vehicle simultaneously.
If the pairing was not successful: what to do if…,
refer to page 208.
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The phone book entries of the telephone
that are stored on the SIM card or the
mobile phone are imported into the vehicle
once the device is detected, depending on
the mobile phone.
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Telephone
> Four devices can be paired.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the Owner's
Manual for the mobile phone.
Communications
6. Select the desired functions. At least one
function must be selected.
> "Telephone"
> "Additional telephone"
> "Audio"
Connecting a particular device
If more than one device is detected by the vehicle, the device at the top of the list is connected.
Another detected device may be connected to
the vehicle. A different device can be connected
by selecting it.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired devices are listed.
3. Select the device to be connected.
7. "OK"
If a device is assigned a function, this may deactivate the function in an already connected
device and cause the other device to be
unpaired.
Exchanging the telephone and auxiliary
phone
If the telephone and auxiliary phone are connected to the vehicle, the function can be
swapped between the two devices.
The functions assigned before the unpairing of
the device are assigned to the device when it is
reconnected. If a device is already connected,
then these functions are deactivated if necessary.
1. "Telephone"
Configuring devices
1. "Telephone"
Additional functions can be activated or deactivated in paired and connected devices.
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
1. "Telephone"
3. Highlight the device to be unpaired.
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
4. Open "Options".
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Unpairing device
All paired devices are listed.
3. Highlight the device to be configured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
207
Communications
Telephone
5. "Remove phone from list"
Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
> Switch the mobile phone off and back on
again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Is the ambient temperature too high or too
low? Do not subject your mobile phone to
extreme ambient temperatures.
Telephone functions not possible.
> Is the mobile phone paired as an auxiliary
phone and is the auxiliary phone function
deactivated? Activate the function.
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones,
refer to page 204.
The mobile phone could not be paired or connected.
> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and in the mobile phone.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive.
> Outgoing call not possible? Connect the
mobile phone as a telephone.
Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of
them are displayed, or they are displayed
incompletely.
> The transfer of phone book entries has not
yet completed.
> In some cases, only the phone book entries
of the mobile phone or the SIM card will be
transferred.
> It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
> Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
> The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the connections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> The data volume of the phone book entry is
too great, e.g. due to additionally stored
information such as notes? Reduce the data
volume.
> Is the audio connection activated? Deactivate the audio connection.
> Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or auxiliary phone? The mobile
phone must be connected as a telephone.
> Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a
charging cable.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
208
The telephone connection quality is low.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possible to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth
signal.
> Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the vicinity of the center console.
> Adjust the volume of the microphone and
speaker separately.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Telephone
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function, please
check the website www.bmw.com/bluetooth
for further notes or contact Customer Relations
or a BMW center.
Operation
Adjusting volume
Communications
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, then
the name and number of the contact are displayed; otherwise, only the number is displayed.
If a contact is assigned more than one phone
number, then only the name of the caller is displayed.
With calls to the auxiliary phone, only the number is displayed if it is transmitted by the network.
An incoming call to the auxiliary phone is automatically rejected if a call with the phone is currently active.
Turn the knob until the desired volume is
reached. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the mobile phone and the
volume of the person on the phone with you.
Depending on the mobile phone, it may be necessary to adjust the volumes.
Accepting a call
Press the
button on the steering wheel
or
"Accept"
Adjustments are only possible during a call and
must be carried out separately for each phone.
When the telephone is unpaired, this deletes
the settings.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
Rejecting a call
3. "Volume settings"
"Reject"
The caller is connected to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
4. To select the desired setting:
"Microphone" or "Loudspeak."
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
209
Communications
Telephone
Ending a call
Press the
button on the steering wheel
or
It is also possible to enter phone numbers by
voice. Only numbers can be spoken aloud.
Association of letters/numbers
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
Letter
Number
3.
ABC
2
DEF
3
"End call"
GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6
PQRS
7
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
Entering phone numbers
Calls with multiple parties
Dialing a number
General information
When entering phone numbers, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers.
It is possible to switch between two calls or to
connect two calls to establish a conference call.
These functions must be supported by the
mobile phone and by the service provider.
Service numbers can be entered more easily,
e.g. 1-888-BMW-CARD.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function may have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
need to be adjusted for this.
When a second call comes in during an ongoing
call, a call-waiting signal sounds.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
4. Switch to letters if necessary.
Select the
symbol.
Select the letters individually.
5. Select the
Select the
210
symbol.
symbol to switch to numbers.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3.
"Hold"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Telephone
The existing call is put on hold.
1. Establish two calls.
2.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
Communications
"Conference call"
The call on hold is continued.
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Switching between two calls, toggling
Muting the microphone
Active call: highlighted.
The microphone can be muted in active calls.
The call on hold is identified with:
"on hold...".
1. "Telephone"
"Return"
"Swap calls"
2. "Active calls"
3.
"Microphone mute"
The phone switches to the call on hold.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single telephone conference call.
The muted microphone is automatically activated:
> If a new call is made.
> When switching between callers on hold.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
211
Communications
Telephone
Keypad dialing
Use keypad dialing to gain access to network
services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely
access an answering machine. This requires
the DTMF code.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select contact from a list or "Dial number"
3.
"Keypad dialing"
4. Enter a DTMF code.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts of the
telephone and shows all contacts for which a
phone number is entered. The entries can be
selected to make a call.
1. "Telephone"
Contacts with a stored phone number: select
the desired contact. The connection is established.
Contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the desired contact and then
select the phone number. The connection is
established.
Editing a contact
Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
2. "Phone book"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts, refer to page 218.
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
are transferred to the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. In some cases, only numbers
that were dialed from the vehicle are displayed.
The last 20 phone numbers dialed are displayed. The sorting of the phone numbers
depends on the mobile phone.
Dialing the number via iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
Calling a contact
Symbol Meaning
Contact with a stored phone number.
Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
Call not possible. The mobile phone
has no reception or network or a Service Request is currently active.
3. Select the desired entry and phone number,
if necessary.
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Telephone
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile
phone.
1. Highlight the entry.
Communications
Calling a number from the list
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
2. Open "Options".
Deleting entries depends upon the mobile
phone.
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
1. Highlight the entry.
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
2. Open "Options".
Saving an entry in the contacts
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
1. Highlight the entry.
4. Select contact if necessary.
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
5. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business", "Mobile" or "Other".
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact"
2. Open "Options".
4. Select contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business", "Mobile" or "Other".
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
Received calls
7. "Store contact"
Displaying calls
The list of received calls in the mobile phone is
transferred into the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. In some cases, only calls that
were received in the vehicle are displayed.
The last 20 calls received are displayed. The
sorting and displaying of phone numbers
depends on the mobile phone.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Hands-free system
General information
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can be continued using the mobile
phone and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the
hands-free system
Calls that have been initiated from outside the
Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued
using the hands-free system if the ignition is
switched on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the call is
automatically switched to hands-free mode.
If the switch does not occur automatically, then
follow the instructions that appear on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to the
Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
213
Communications
Telephone
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can also be continued using the mobile
phone if so desired, depending on the mobile
phone.
At this point, follow the instructions that appear
on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to
the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.
Operation by voice
With voice activation system:
Operation, refer to page 25.
Without voice activation system:
Depending upon the equipment, the mobile
phone can be voice-operated as described
below.
The list of short commands in the Owner's
Manual applies only to this type of voice activation.
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
{Help}.
Possible commands are read aloud.
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
Each digit can be spoken individually or combined into a sequence to accelerate the entry
process.
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
{Dial name} or {Name}.
Example: dialing phone numbers
1. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
2. {Dial number}
The system replies: {{Please say the number}}.
The concept
> The mobile phone can be operated without
removing your hand from the steering
wheel.
> In many cases, the entry process is supported by means of announcements or
questions.
> {...}indicates commands for voice activation.
3. For example: {123 456 7890}
The system replies: {{123 456 7890. Continue ?}}
4. {Dial}
The system replies: {{Dialing number}}
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
Voice commands
1. {Dial number}.
Activating voice activation system
2. Say the phone number.
1. Press the
3. {Dial}.
button on the steering wheel.
2. Say the command.
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Finishing voice input
Press the
or
{Cancel}.
button on the steering wheel
Correcting phone number
Digit sequences can be deleted after the system has repeated the digits.
{Correct number}.
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Telephone
The command can be repeated as often as necessary.
Deleting phone number
{Delete}.
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Communications
To listen to and select the entries
1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. Say {Dial number} when the desired
entry is read.
Select an entry
Redialing
1. {Dial name}.
{Redial}.
Voice phone book
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice
phone book.
The entries must be entered using voice commands and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
Store the entry
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm request: {Yes}
Adjusting volume
Turn knob during announcement.
> The volume remains the same, even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
> The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. {Save name}.
Notes
2. Say the name aloud. Do not exceed a
speaking duration of about 2 seconds.
Notes on Emergency Requests
3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system.
4. {Save}.
Delete the entry
1. {Delete name}.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm request: {Yes}
Delete all entries
1. {Delete phonebook}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm request: {Yes}
3. Confirm request again: {Yes}
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an emergency call. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 276,
in the vicinity of the interior rearview mirror.
Ambient conditions
> Say the commands, numbers and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis and speed.
> Always say the commands in the language
of the system. The language of the voice
activation of the mobile phone is preset and
cannot be changed via the Control Display.
> Keep the doors, windows, glass roof, and
convertible top closed to prevent interference from outside noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
215
Communications
Telephone
Snap-in adapter
Inserting mobile phone
General information
Detailed information on snap-in adapters that
compatibly support mobile phone functions can
be found at your BMW center.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and some
functions may no longer be carried out.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
follow the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
1. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be
necessary to remove the protective cap of
the antenna connector and from the USB
connection of the mobile phone.
In the center armrest.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons
facing upward toward the electrical connections and press down until it engages.
Inserting snap-in adapter
Removing mobile phone
Installation location
1. Press the button and remove the cover.
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front,
arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2, until
it clicks into place.
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Office
Communications
Office
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
> Time zone, time, and date, refer to page 90,
are correctly set on the Control Display and
on the mobile phone in order, for example,
to correctly display appointments.
> Office is activated, refer to page 205.
Updating
Every time that the mobile phone is connected
to the vehicle, data are updated. Appointments,
tasks, notes and reminders can be updated
separately.
General information
1. "Office"
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text
messages and mobile phone e-mails can be
displayed using the Control Display if the
mobile phone compatibly supports these functions and the required Bluetooth radio standards.
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders"
For information about which mobile phones and
functions support the functions of Office, go to
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
A limited number of compatible mobile phones
are available for Office.
Contents are only displayed completely when
the vehicle is stopped.
Only read access to the mobile phone is possible.
Do not use Office while driving. Make
entries only when traffic and road conditions permit; otherwise, you may endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users by
being distracted.<
3. Open "Options".
4. "Update data"
Data from the mobile phone are again transferred to the vehicle.
Current office
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as upcoming appointments are
displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Selecting the desired entry to display
details.
Requirements
> A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, the data access to the mobile
phone must be confirmed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
217
Communications
Office
Contacts
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
General information
2. "Edit contact"
Contacts can be created and edited. The contacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be used as destinations for navigation and the phone numbers can
be dialed.
Displaying contacts
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
If a contact is changed, the changes are not
stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is displayed.
Selecting a contact as a destination
1. Select the desired contact.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
2. Select address.
With contacts from the mobile phone, the
address must be compared with the navigation data stored in the vehicle. In this case:
Correct the address.
Symbol
Storage location
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"
No
symbol
In the vehicle; the address has
not been checked as a destination.
Checking the address as a destination
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone
Dialing phone numbers
An address that is to be used in route guidance
must correspond to the navigation data stored
in the vehicle. The address can be checked to
ensure this.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Open "Options".
2. Select phone number.
3. "Check as destination"
The connection is established.
218
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Office
If the address is corrected and stored, then a
copy is established in the vehicle. The address
is not changed on the mobile phone.
Contact types
New contact
Symbol
Communications
Phone numbers and addresses can be
assigned various contact types.
Meaning
A contact can be associated with up to 8 phone
numbers, 2 addresses, 3 email addresses, and
one Internet address.
Private phone number
1. "Office"
Mobile phone number
2. "Contacts"
Other phone number
3. Open "Options".
Private address
4. "New contact"
Business address
Business phone number
Defining a home address
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting name sorting
5. If input boxes are already filled with previous
entries: "Delete input fields"
Names can be displayed in different orders.
6. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
2. "Contacts"
7. Enter text and assign a contact type.
8. When equipped with a navigation system:
enter address. It is only possible to enter
addresses that are contained in the navigation data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
that route guidance is possible for all
addresses.
9. "Accept address" if necessary
10. "Store contact in vehicle"
1. "Office"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts are stored in
your mobile phone, the sorting of names can
differ from the sorting selected.
Displaying contact pictures
Pictures stored with contacts are stored in the
vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to
the vehicle. The mobile phone must support
this function.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
5. "Show images"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
219
Communications
Office
The display of all contact pictures is activated or
deactivated.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
Message type
A symbol indicates the type of message.
Read message.
Unread message.
Symbol
Message type
Text message
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
My Info
3. Highlight the contact.
Message from the Concierge
service, refer to page 229
4. "Options"
Messages from BMW Info, refer
to page 222
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
E-mail from mobile phone
Messages
General information
The displaying of text messages and emails
from the mobile phone depends on whether the
mobile phone supports transmission into the
vehicle from the mobile phone. Text messages
and e-mails may not be supported by the service provider or the function may have to be
separately activated. After a mobile phone is
paired for the first time, the transmission may
take several minutes. Messages are only displayed completely when the vehicle is stopped.
Messages from the auxiliary phone are not
transmitted.
To display various messages:
> Text messages.
> Messages from My info.
> Messages from the BMW Concierge service.
> Messages from BMW Info.
> Emails from the mobile phone.
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
220
Filtering message lists
A message list can be filtered if there is more
than one message type.
1. "Filter:"
2. Select the message type.
> "All"
All messages are displayed.
> "E-mail"
Only text messages from mobile phones
are displayed.
> "Services messages"
Only messages from the BMW Concierge service, My Info, and BMW Info
are displayed.
> "Text message"
Only text messages from mobile phones
are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Office
Communications
Deleting messages
My Info
Messages from the Concierge service, My Info,
BMW Info, and BMW Online can be deleted.
Selecting additional functions
To delete a message:
Additional functions are available when a message is selected.
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
Symbol
3. Select the desired message.
Function
4. Open "Options".
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
5. Open "Delete message".
"Call"
To delete all messages:
If the message contains a number, a
telephone connection is established.
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
"Select phone number"
3. Open "Options".
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired
number from the list. A telephone
connection is established.
4. "Delete all messages"
Text message
Calling a text message sender
1. Select the desired message.
2. Select the
symbol.
Saving sender in the contacts
1. Highlight the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected, see page 224.
Messages from the Concierge service
Saving an address
1.
Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting additional functions
Additional functions are available when a message is selected.
Symbol
Function
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Reading text messages aloud
Having text messages read aloud, refer to
page 225.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
221
Communications
Symbol
Office
The following functions are available:
Function
"Call"
If the message contains a number, a
telephone connection is established.
Symbol
Function
"Further information"
Detailed information about a message is displayed. This does not
incur any costs.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired
number from the list. A telephone
connection is established.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
"Call"
If the message contains a number, a
telephone connection is established.
"Further information"
Displaying additional information.
"Select phone number"
BMW Info
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired
number from the list. A telephone
connection is established.
General information
Messages from BMW about technical campaigns and news from BMW.
Displaying messages
E-mail
Displaying e-mail
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3.
Select the desired message.
Displaying e-mail contacts
Select the desired message.
If the sender and receiver of an e-mail were
transmitted from a mobile phone, they will be
displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail address is stored in the contacts,
then the contact is displayed. Select contact to
display details.
If the e-mail address is not stored in the contacts, then it may be that only the e-mail
address is displayed.
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected, see page 224.
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Communications
Office
Deactivating entire display
Displaying appointment
When opening an e-mail when in the vehicle, it
is completely transferred to the vehicle. This
may result in charges.
1. Select the desired appointment.
2. To scroll through appointment, if necessary:
1. "Office"
> Turn the controller.
2. "Messages"
> Select the
symbol.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Fully download e-mails"
Only a part of an e-mail from a mobile phone
is loaded into the vehicle.
Reading e-mail
Reading e-mail, see page 225.
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected, see page 224.
Reading an appointment aloud
Reading an appointment aloud, refer to
page 225.
Calendar
Displaying calendar
Appointments from the last 20 days and the
next 50 days can be displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Calendar"
Appointments of the current day are displayed.
Selecting calendar day
1. Select date.
2. Select desired day or date.
> "Next day"
> "Date:"
> "Previous day"
Tasks
Displaying task list
Display open tasks that must be completed
within the next 90 days.
1. "Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sorting task list
1. Select the top line in the task list.
2. To select a sorting criterion:
> "Priority (!)"
> "Subject"
> "Due date"
> "Today"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
223
Communications
Office
Displaying task
Reading a note aloud
1. Select the desired task.
Reading a note aloud, refer to page 225.
2. To scroll through the task, if necessary:
> Turn the controller.
> Select the
symbol.
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected, see page 224.
Reminders for imminent appointments and
tasks are displayed. After an appointment has
passed or a task is due, the reminder is no
longer displayed.
1. "Office"
Reading a task aloud
Reading a task aloud, refer to page 225.
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The associated appointment or task is displayed.
Notes
Displaying notes
Using contact data
1. "Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying a note
1. Select the desired note.
Overview
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected.
To display a contact or dial a phone
number:
1.
"Use contact data"
2. To scroll through the note, if necessary:
> Turn the controller.
> Select the
symbol.
2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:
Using contact data
Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or
selected, see page 224.
224
> Select a contact to display a detailed
view of the contact.
> Select a phone number to directly establish a connection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Office
Storing contact data
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Highlight a phone number or e-mail
address.
3. Open "Options".
Communications
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones,
refer to page 204.
> Appointments, tasks, notes, texts, or emails
from the mobile phone are not displayed?
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
The mobile phone is not suitable for the
missing function or is not correctly connected.
Reading aloud
The mobile phone has not been assigned
the Office function.
Text messages, emails, appointments, tasks,
and notes can be read aloud.
The mobile phone is connected as an auxiliary phone.
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
The appointments are older than 20 days
and are more than 50 days in the future.
2. Select the
The tasks have been marked as completed
or are more than 90 days in the future.
symbol.
While the message is being read aloud, you
have the following options:
>
"Pause"
Interrupt the reading. Select again to
resume the reading.
>
"Back to beginning"
Read message again from the beginning.
> Select the
symbol.
Skip back one paragraph.
> Select the
symbol.
Skip over a paragraph.
> To terminate the reading, move the controller toward the left.
Depending on the number of appointments,
tasks, notes, and messages stored in the
mobile phone, not all of them are displayed
in the vehicle.
> Appointments or tasks from the mobile
phone are not being displayed at the correct
time?
The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly
set in the Control Display and in the mobile
phone.
> Texts of entries are not displayed completely?
Texts are already shortened by the mobile
phone.
Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle can take a few minutes.
> Contact pictures are not being displayed?
Up to max. 200 contact pictures can be
stored in the vehicle.
> If you have gone through all items in the list
and still cannot activate the desired function please contact Customer Relations or a
BMW center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
225
Communications
Contacts
Contacts
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
4. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
Note
In equipment packages without mobile phone
preparation.
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The
addresses can be used as destinations for navigation.
5. Entering text, refer to page 23.
When equipped with a navigation system:
enter address. It is only possible to enter
addresses that are contained in the navigation data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
that route guidance is possible for all
addresses.
6. "Store" if necessary
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
New contact
Defining a home address
1. "Contacts"
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
2. "New contact"
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts
General information
3. If input boxes are already filled with previous
entries: "Delete input fields".
226
List of all contacts that are stored in the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Contacts
Communications
Displaying contacts
Selecting a contact as a destination
1. "Contacts"
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "My contacts"
2. Select address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"
Checking the address as a destination
An address that is to be used in route guidance
must correspond to the navigation data stored
in the vehicle. The address can be checked to
ensure this.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Symbol
Storage location
No symbol
In the vehicle; the address has
not been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
Selecting name sorting
Names can be displayed in different orders.
1. "My contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported using
Personal Profile, refer to page 30.
Deleting contacts
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
3. Change the entries.
4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
227
Communications
ConnectedDrive
ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
BMW Assist
General information
BMW Assist provides a number of different services. For example, the position data of the
vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center when an Emergency Request
is sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the contract individually agreed upon.
After the contract has expired, the BMW Assist
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without you having to visit a
BMW center. After the BMW Assist system has
been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will
be available. The BMW Assist system can be
reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.
Requirements
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
into a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the services.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine its current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS
signal must be available.
228
> The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your BMW center or with the
BMW Assist Response Center. The service
must have been fully enabled.
> BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
> Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
> Automatic Emergency Request: under certain conditions, a connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center is established after
a serious accident. If possible, the BMW
Assist Response Center then speaks with
you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and
position data are transmitted during this
call.
> Customer Relations: connection to Customer Relations for information on all
aspects of your vehicle.
> TeleServices: the data on your vehicle's
service status or required inspections are
transmitted to your BMW center, either
automatically before a service due date or
when you request a service appointment.
> Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist
Response Center provides assistance if, for
example, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
> Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report to
the police that your vehicle was stolen, the
BMW Assist Response Center can determine its position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
ConnectedDrive
> In addition, the optional Convenience Plan
offers Concierge service and information on
route planning, the traffic situation and
weather. Using Critical Calling, a limited
number of calls can be made via the BMW
Assist Response Center, for example if the
mobile phone is not available or discharged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
TeleService:
General information
TeleServices supports communication with
your BMW center.
Communications
Concierge service
General information
The Concierge service of BMW Assist will
inform you, for example, about upcoming
events, filling station, or hotels and supplies you
with their phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly through the BMW
Assist Concierge service. Use of the Concierge
service requires an additional activation by the
BMW Assist Response Center.
Starting the Concierge service
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
> Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the BMW center. In
this way, the BMW center can plan its work
in advance. This shortens the duration of
the service appointment.
> In the event of a breakdown, data on the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
> The service varies by country.
> Connection may incur charges.
> Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
3. "Start service"
A voice contact with the BMW Concierge service is established. Phone numbers and
addresses can be transmitted as a message.
> BMW Assist is activated.
> Wireless reception is available.
Messages
> Ignition switched on.
Information about messages, refer to page 220.
Using TeleService
Generally, TeleService is activated in the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance
If TeleService is not activated, it is possible to
establish a voice contact to the BMW Group
Mobile Service.
At a glance
For additional uses or to deactivate the services, consult your BMW center or contact Customer Relations.
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.
Contact with BMW Roadside Assistance can
also be established using a Check Control message, refer to page 92.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
229
Communications
ConnectedDrive
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance
without BMW Assist or BMW
TeleServices
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is displayed. If a mobile phone is paired, a connection to BMW Roadside Assistance is
established.
After transmission of the data, a voice connection is established to Roadside Assistance.
BMW Online
Overview
You can use BMW Online to search the yellow
pages.
License conditions:
This product contains NetFront Browser software of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS Co., Ltd., in Japan and other countries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance
with BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices
In a vehicle with TeleService, assistance is first
offered through the TeleService Diagnosis and
then if necessary, through the TeleService
Help.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
Requirements
> Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
> The vehicle is located within wireless network coverage.
> The date setting on the Control Display is
current.
Starting BMW Online
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Online"
BMW TeleService Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
critical to vehicle diagnosis. These data are
automatically transmitted.
230
3. "OK" if necessary.
The BMW Online start page is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
ConnectedDrive
Using BMW Online
To select and display content:
> Turn the controller to highlight an element.
Communications
The Customer Relations phone number is displayed. If a mobile phone is paired, a connection
is established to Customer Relations.
> Press the controller to display an element.
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Service Request
Overview
Canceling
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
Inform your BMW center that you need to
schedule a service appointment. The Teleservice data is transmitted during a Service
Request. If possible, your BMW center will
establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
Overview
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
231
Communications
ConnectedDrive
Automatic Service Request
The Teleservice data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW
center prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the center will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
"Update BMW Assist"
Data transfer
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
Check when your BMW center was notified.
2. Open "Options".
1. "Vehicle Info"
3. "Data transfer"
2. "Vehicle status"
Apps
Overview
Certain software applications of a suitable
mobile phone can be integrated into the vehicle.
These software applications are displayed on
the Control Display. They can be operated via
iDrive.
3. Open "Options".
Requirements
4. "Last Service Request"
> The mobile phone's operating system supports the use of apps.
Service status
> Software applications are installed on the
mobile phone and are operational.
Displaying available services
> Suitable mobile phone.
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Status"
3. "Available services"
> Appropriate mobile phone contract.
Additional costs possibly incurred are not
included in the price of apps.
Information about suitable mobile phones,
available software applications, and their
installation can be found at www.bmw.com/
connectivity or at your BMW center.
Only make entries when traffic conditions
permit. Otherwise, you may endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users by
being distracted.
For safety reasons, some software applications
can only be used when the vehicle is stopped.<
Updating BMW Assist
To avoid malfunctions, only use software
applications approved by BMW.<
Manually updating BMW TeleServices, BMW
Assist, and BMW Online.
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
ConnectedDrive
Using apps
1. Connect the mobile phone using the snapin adapter or the USB audio interface.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. Select the desired software application.
Displaying status
Communications
> Certain versions of the mobile phone used
and the software they use may not permit
apps to be used at the same time as the
Bluetooth hands-free system.
If necessary, restart the software application on the mobile phone after completing a
call.
You can display information about the currently
available software applications.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"
Plugin
Selected functions of the mobile phone are displayed on the Control Display. They can be
operated via iDrive.
1. Connect the mobile phone using the snapin adapter.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Use the controller to navigate in the displayed functions and select the desired category or track, for example.
Press the button to move one level up or
back within the functions of the mobile
phone.
Press the button twice to return back to
the main menu.
Notes
> The range of apps that are displayed in the
Control Display depends on the range of
software applications installed on the
mobile phone.
> The data transfer of the software applications from the mobile phone to the vehicle
may take some time. Some software applications are dependent on the speed of the
available Internet connection of the mobile
phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
Roadside Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Mobility
Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
General information
Always switch off the engine before refueling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to
the tank and a message will be displayed.<
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message will be displayed if the fuel cap is loose or
missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, you can release
the fuel filler flap manually:
Coupe
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel containers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler flap
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand sidewall of the cargo area.
Opening
2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler flap is released.
1. Open the fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly
press the rear edge.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Refueling
Mobility
Fuel specifications
Convertible
Gasoline engine: required fuel
Never use fuels labeled at the fuel pump as
metal-containing.
Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline
with metal-containing additives doing so
can cause permanent damage to the catalytic
converter or other components.<
1. Loosen the right-hand cargo area trim panel
by turning the screws by 90°, see arrow.
2. Slightly lift the top section of the panel. It is
not necessary to remove the entire panel.
3. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler flap is released.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing 85Ξ ethanol, nor with FlexFuel.
Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system
will be damaged.<
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Observe the following when refueling
Gasoline with lower AKI
When handling fuels, follow the safety
instructions provided at filling stations;
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage.<
The minimum AKI Rating is:
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> Premature pump shutoff
> Reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 16.1 US gal/61 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
> 328i/xDrive: 87
> 335i, 335i/xDrive: 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use any gasoline below the specified minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant differences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10Ξ ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8Ξ oxygen by weight,
that is, 15Ξ MTBE or 3Ξ methanol plus an
equivalent amount of cosolvent, will not void the
applicable warranties with respect to defects in
materials or workmanship.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
237
Mobility
Refueling
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
page 103, or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,
refer to page 100.<
Inflation pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved and tire brands recommended by BMW; a list of these is available
from your BMW center.<
Tire inflation pressures
For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressures, observe the following:
Information for your safety
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure.
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that can not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident. Do not drive
with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using
run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the columns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
door is open.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
The maximum permissible speed for
these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
239
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the columns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could
occur.
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328i
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S RSC
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 V RSC
2.2/32
2.6/38
2.5/36
3.0/44
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.2/32
2.7/39
2.5/36
3.0/44
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.5/36
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
-
2.4/35
-
2.7/39
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
2.2/32
-
2.5/36
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.7/39
-
2.9/42
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.5/36
-
2.5/36
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.0/44
-
3.0/44
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
With Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.2/32
2.6/38
2.5/36
3.0/44
225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
2.6/38
2.9/42
3.4/49
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.2/32
2.7/39
2.9/42
3.4/49
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.9/42
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
-
2.4/35
-
3.0/44
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
2.2/32
-
2.7/39
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.7/39
-
3.2/46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
241
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.5/36
-
2.7/39
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.0/44
-
3.2/46
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
242
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328xi
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S RSC
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 V RSC
2.2/32
2.6/38
2.4/35
2.9/42
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.2/32
2.7/39
2.5/36
3.0/44
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.3/33
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.3/33
-
2.7/39
2.3/33
-
2.5/36
-
-
2.6/38
-
2.9/42
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.7/39
-
2.7/39
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.0/44
-
3.0/44
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
243
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
With Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.2/32
2.6/38
2.4/35
2.9/42
225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
2.6/38
2.8/41
3.3/48
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.2/32
2.7/39
2.8/41
3.3/48
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.8/41
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
-
2.3/33
-
2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
2.3/33
-
2.7/39
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.6/38
-
3.2/46
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.7/39
-
2.8/41
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.0/44
-
3.2/46
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
244
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 335i
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.2/32
2.7/39
2.6/38
3.1/45
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.6/38
3.1/45
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.4/35
-
2.8/41
2.2/32
-
2.6/38
-
-
2.7/39
-
3.1/45
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y
2.2/32
-
2.4/35
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y
-
2.7/39
-
2.8/41
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.6/38
-
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.1/45
-
3.1/45
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
With Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.2/32
2.7/39
2.6/38
3.1/45
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.9/42
3.4/49
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
-
2.4/35
-
3.0/44
2.2/32
-
2.8/41
-
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.7/39
-
3.3/48
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y
2.2/32
-
2.5/36
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y
-
2.7/39
-
3.0/44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
245
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.6/38
-
2.8/41
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.1/45
-
3.3/48
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
246
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 335xi
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.2/32
2.7/39
2.7/39
3.1/45
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.7/39
3.1/45
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.7/39
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
-
2.4/35
-
2.7/39
2.4/35
-
2.6/38
-
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y
-
2.7/39
-
2.9/42
2.4/35
-
2.4/35
-
-
2.7/39
-
2.7/39
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.7/39
-
2.7/39
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.1/45
-
3.1/45
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
With Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.2/32
2.7/39
2.7/39
3.1/45
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.9/42
3.4/49
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.7/39
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
-
2.4/35
-
3.0/44
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
2.4/35
-
2.9/42
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.7/39
-
3.3/48
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y
2.4/35
-
2.7/39
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y
-
2.7/39
-
2.9/42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
247
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.7/39
-
2.9/42
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.1/45
-
3.3/48
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
248
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Coupe: inflation pressures 335is
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.2/32
2.7/39
2.6/38
3.1/45
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.4/35
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
2.3/33
2.9/42
3.0/44
3.4/49
-
2.9/42
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.8/41
-
3.4/49
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y
2.3/33
-
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y
-
2.8/41
-
3.1/45
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.7/39
-
2.9/42
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.2/46
-
3.4/49
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
249
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 328i
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.5/36
3.0/44
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.7/39
3.2/46
225/45 R 17 91 W RSC
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.5/36
3.0/44
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.4/35
2.9/42
2.7/39
3.2/46
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.5/36
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.5/36
-
2.9/42
2.4/35
-
2.6/38
-
-
2.9/42
-
3.1/45
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y
2.4/35
-
2.4/35
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y
-
2.9/42
-
2.9/42
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.7/39
-
2.7/39
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.2/46
-
3.2/46
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
250
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
Tire size
Mobility
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
With Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.5/36
3.0/44
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 W RSC
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.8/41
3.3/48
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.4/35
2.9/42
2.9/42
3.4/49
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.8/41
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
-
2.5/36
-
3.1/45
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
2.4/35
-
2.9/42
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.9/42
-
3.4/49
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y
2.4/35
-
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y
-
2.9/42
-
3.1/45
2.7/39
-
2.9/42
-
-
3.2/46
-
3.4/49
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
251
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 335i
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.7/39
3.2/46
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.4/35
2.9/42
2.7/39
3.2/46
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.5/36
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.5/36
-
2.9/42
2.4/35
-
2.6/38
-
-
2.9/42
-
3.1/45
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y
2.4/35
-
2.4/35
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y
-
2.9/42
-
2.9/42
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.7/39
-
2.7/39
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.2/46
-
3.2/46
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
With Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.7/39
3.2/46
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.4/35
2.9/42
2.9/42
3.4/49
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V
2.2/32
-
2.8/41
-
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V
-
2.5/36
-
3.1/45
2.4/35
-
2.9/42
-
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.9/42
-
3.4/49
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y
2.4/35
-
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y
-
2.9/42
-
3.1/45
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
Tire size
Mobility
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
2.7/39
-
2.9/42
-
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
-
3.2/46
-
3.4/49
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
253
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Convertible: inflation pressures 335is
Tire size
Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.3/33
2.8/41
2.7/39
3.2/46
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
2.4/35
2.9/42
2.9/42
3.4/49
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC
2.4/35
-
2.9/42
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC
-
2.9/42
-
3.4/49
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y
2.4/35
-
2.6/38
-
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y
-
2.9/42
-
3.1/45
2.7/39
-
2.9/42
-
-
3.2/46
-
3.4/49
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
254
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
e.g.
225/45 R 17 91 V
Mobility
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating, not on ZR tires
Speed code letter, in
front of the R on ZR tires
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
Speed code letter
Tread wear
Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
e.g.
DOT xxxx xxx 1011
Manufacturer's
code for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT … 1011 means that the
tire was manufactured in week 10 of 2011.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
255
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Temperature
Minimum tread depth
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legislation only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 257.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than summer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
256
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has
worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has
worn to a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed,
especially if your vehicle is equipped with lowprofile tires.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for example, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
Mobility
In these cases, reduce speed immediately and have wheels and tires thoroughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire dealer. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard
to vehicle occupants and other road users.<
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions, which could
lead to body contact and thus to severe accidents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot guarantee their driving
safety.<
Tire age
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire combination at your BMW center.
For various reasons, such as the development
of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replacement after no more than 6 years, regardless of
the actual wear of the tires.
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding:
DOT... 3010 means that the tire was manufactured in week 30 of 2010.
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires mounted only
by your BMW center or by a tire dealer. If
this work is not carried out properly, there is a
danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels
are balanced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use
retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include potentially different tire casing structures and often
wide variations in tire age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or
FTM.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been damaged, mount the previous wheel and tire combination again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only
use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise,
the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to
detect a puncture, refer to page 102. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
Recommended tire brands
Correct wheels and tires
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
Certain makes of tire are recommended by
BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall
of the tire.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
257
Mobility
Wheels and tires
When properly used, these tires meet the highest standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Run-flat tires
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for driving on
winter roads or at temperatures below +457/
+76. Although all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
generally fail to provide the same levels of coldweather performance as winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and accidents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the mounted
tires must be displayed in your field of view.
Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center
can supply these labels.
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum
tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels
between the front and rear axles, even if all tires
have the same size, as this could impair driving
characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes,
swapping wheels between the axles is not permissible.
258
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforcement in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can
continue to be used subject to certain restrictions, even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 101.
Snow chains
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your BMW center for
more information.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
the rear wheels only. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow
chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or
50 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, you may find it
helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to
page 98.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Engine compartment
Mobility
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Important parts of the engine compartment
1
Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 263
2
Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp cleaning system and window washer system,
refer to page 72
3
Jump-starting connection, refer to
page 278
4
Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
259
Mobility
Engine compartment
Hood
Do not work on the car unless you possess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are not familiar with the regulations to be
followed, have the necessary work on the vehicle carried out only by your BMW center; if this
work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards.<
Closing
Releasing
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 10 in/
25 cm. It must be clearly heard to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.
If you see any signs while driving your vehicle
that the hood is not completely closed, stop at
once and close it securely.<
Pull the lever.
Engine oil
Opening
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level
monitor.
In order to avoid damage, make sure that
the wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood. Do not open the
engine hood before the engine has cooled
down; otherwise, injuries may result.<
For a precise measurement and display of the
oil level, it is necessary that the engine be at
operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted
driving for at least approx. 6.2 miles/10 km. You
can have the oil level displayed while you are
driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a
level surface and the engine is running.
Press the release handle and open the hood.
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Engine compartment
Display in the instrument cluster
Mobility
3
Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 262.
4
Oil level is too high.
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
5
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol is shown in the display,
accompanied by the word "OIL".
2. Press button 2 in the turn signal/high beam
lever.
The oil level is checked and the reading displayed.
The oil level sensor is defective.
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to page 87. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Display via iDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Possible displays
3. "Engine oil level"
1
Oil level OK
Possible messages
2
Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is on the move.
> "Engine oil level OK"
> "Measurement not possible at this time."
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
261
Mobility
Engine compartment
> "Measuring engine oil level...":
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface and the engine
is running, and about 5 minutes while the
car is moving.
If engine oil was added, it may take up to
30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil below.
If the oil level is below the minimum value,
add engine oil immediately to avoid engine
damage.
> "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
> "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked."
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to page 87. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
If the engine oil is too high, have the vehicle checked immediately; failure to do so
may result in engine damage.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the relevant
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health
hazards may result.<
Oil grades to add
Do not use oil additives as this could
result in engine damage.<
When selecting an engine oil, make sure
to use one from the SAE viscosity classes
0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 or 5W-30; failure to do
so may result in malfunctions or engine damage.<
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Some oil grades may not be available in all
countries.
Approved oil grades
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Adding engine oil
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-04
Additional information about approved oil
grades is available at your BMW center.
Add up to 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil only
after a corresponding message is shown on the
Control Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, the engine could be damaged.<
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Engine compartment
Mobility
Alternative oil types
Checking coolant level
If approved oils are not available, you can add
quantities of up to 1 US quart/1 liter of another
oil with the following specifications:
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Gasoline engine
1. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down.
API SM or higher
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
Diesel engine
API ILSAC GF-5
Oil change
Oil changes should only be performed by a
BMW center.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
the filler neck.
Coolant
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center about
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is important to follow the instructions on the containers.<
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.
Comply with the appropriate environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant additives.<
Coolant temperature
If the coolant and therefore the engine overheats, a warning lamp lights up. A message
appears on the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
263
Mobility
Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
BMW Maintenance System
> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores servicerequirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your dealership Service
Advisor can read out this data from the remote
control unit, and propose an optimized maintenance approach. Whenever you take your car in
for servicing you should therefore give your
dealership Service Advisor the remote control
unit that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set correctly, refer to page 91; otherwise, the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS
is not assured.<
The BMW maintenance system advises you of
necessary maintenance measures and helps
you maintain the traffic and operating safety of
the vehicle.
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Condition Based Service CBS
Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service requirements.
Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected maintenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, refer to page 87:
264
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service procedures are confirmed by entries in your vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Maintenance
Socket for Onboard
Diagnosis OBD
Mobility
Data memory
Your vehicle records data about the operation,
faults, and user settings. These data are stored
in the vehicle and in extract form, in the remote
control, and can be read out using suitable
devices at your BMW center. The data that are
read out are used to support service procedures and repairs or to optimize and expand
vehicle functions. If you have a BMW Assist
contract, certain vehicle data can also be transmitted directly from the vehicle in order to
enable the desired services.
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for checking components relevant to the composition of
the vehicle's emissions.
Emissions
The warning lamp lights up:
The vehicle is producing higher emissions. The trip can be continued. Have
the car checked as soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning
lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If
this happens, you should reduce your speed
and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as
possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly
lead to serious damage of emissions-related
components, especially the catalytic converter.
The warning lamp lights up if the fuel
cap is not properly tightened and the
OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. Make sure that the fuel cap is correctly positioned and close it until it audibly
clicks.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
265
Mobility
Care
Care
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Care products
Regular cleaning and care contributes significantly to the value retention of your BMW.
BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your
vehicle with products that are approved by
BMW for this purpose.
Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on
the products and services available for cleaning
and caring for your BMW.
Original BMW CareProducts have been
material-tested, laboratory-checked and
proven in the field, and offer optimal care and
protection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents as these may result in damage.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or hazardous to your
health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety
instructions on the packaging. When cleaning
inside the vehicle, always open the doors or
windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, provide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products
designed for cleaning vehicles.<
Exterior care
Washing the vehicle
Especially during the winter months,
ensure that the vehicle is washed more
frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead
to vehicle damage.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and the brake discs can corrode.<
Automatic car washes
Give preference to car washes that use cloth or
soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
Do not use high-pressure car washes;
otherwise, water may drip into the vehicle
around the windows.<
Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is
suitable for your BMW. Check the following:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 285.
> If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors,
refer to page 55.
> Maximum permissible tire width.
Avoid car washes with guide rail heights
over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is the
danger of damaging chassis parts.<
Preparations before driving into an automatic
car wash:
> Unscrew the rod antenna.
> Deactivate the rain sensor to prevent
undesired wiper operation.
> Remove additional add-on parts, e.g. spoilers or phone antennas, if they could be
damaged.
> Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock.
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Care
Automatic transmission
Before driving into an automatic car wash, perform the following steps to ensure that the vehicle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Move the selector lever to position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
Mobility
maintain a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm from
them.<
Manual car wash
When washing the vehicle by hand, use large
quantities of water and car shampoo if necessary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or washing brush, applying light pressure only.
Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the rain sensor or switch off the ignition to prevent unintentional activation of the
wipers.<
Observe local regulations pertaining to
washing vehicles by hand.<
Before driving into an automatic car wash, perform the following steps to ensure that the vehicle can roll:
Headlamps
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or
insect remover and wash away with copious
quantities of water.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
The transmission is switched into position P:
> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes
> If you remove the infrared remote control
from the ignition lock
Steam jets/high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, make sure to maintain sufficient
distance from the vehicle and do not exceed a
temperature of 1407/606.
Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or
temperature can lead to component damage or
water penetration. Follow the operating instructions of the high-pressure washer.<
When using high-pressure washers, do
not spray the sensors, e.g. of the Park
Distance Control, for an extended period and
Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or
corrosive cleaning agents.
Thaw ice with a windshield deicer and do not
use an ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the
windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
containing quartz.<
Convertible: retractable hardtop
Proceed as you would in a normal car wash.
When you open a wet hardtop, water
drops may run into the cargo area. If necessary, remove items from the cargo area
beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.<
Paintwork care
Regular care contributes to value retention and
protects the paintwork against the long-term
effects of damaging substances.
Region-specific environmental influences can
damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
267
Mobility
Care
important to adapt the frequency and scope of
car care accordingly.
Immediately remove aggressive materials such
as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree sap or
bird droppings to prevent damage to the paintwork.
Repairing paintwork damage
Immediately repair scratches or similar
damage, such as that caused by stones
hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent
rusting.<
BMW recommends having paintwork damage
repaired by a professional paint repair workshop according to BMW specifications using
original BMW paint materials.
Preservation
A preservation treatment is necessary when
water no longer beads off the clean paintwork
surface. Only use products for paintwork preservation that contain carnauba or synthetic
waxes.
Rubber seals
Treat only with water or rubber care products.
Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline, or abrasive cleaning agents and
do not use steam jets hotter than of 1407/
606; otherwise, damage may occur.<
Outside sensors/cameras
Keep the sensors and cameras on the
outside of the vehicle, e.g. those for Park
Distance Control, clean and free of ice to ensure
that they remain fully functional.<
Interior care
Upholstery fabrics/cloth trims/
Alcantara fabrics
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to
remove superficial dirt.
To remove severe spots such as stains from
beverages, use a soft sponge or lint-free
microfiber cloth and suitable interior cleaners.
Follow the instructions on the packaging.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams
using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong
rubbing.<
Do not use silicon-containing care products on rubber seals; otherwise, noise
and damage could occur.<
Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the
seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are
closed.<
Chrome parts
Leather/leather trim
Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radiator grill, door handles or window frames with
copious quantities of water and a shampoo
additive, especially when roads are treated with
deicing salt. For additional treatment, use a
chrome polish.
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight irregularities in the
leather are a typical characteristic of natural
leather.<
Light-alloy wheels
For technical reasons, dust is generated during
braking that is deposited on the light-alloy
wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acidfree rim cleaner.
268
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
increased wear and causing the leather surface
to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, frequently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or
vacuum cleaner.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Care
Treat the leather at least once every two
months using a leather lotion as dirt and grease
will gradually attack the leather's protective
layer.
Carpet and floor mats
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving.
Do not place additional floor mats onto an existing one or onto other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they have been removed, e.g.
for cleaning.<
Interior plastic parts
> Imitation leather surfaces
> Lamp glasses
> Display pane of instrument cluster
> Matte parts
Mobility
Displays
To clean displays, e.g. of the radio or instrument
cluster, use a cleaning cloth for displays or a
soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.
Avoid applying excessive pressure when
cleaning the displays; otherwise, damage
may occur.<
Do not use chemical or abrasive household cleaning agents. Keep all types of
fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces
or electrical components may be corroded or
damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may damage parts of the drive.<
Vehicle storage
If you plan to park your vehicle for longer than
three months, your BMW center will be happy
to advise you.
Clean with water and solvent-free plastic
cleaner if necessary.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a
damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Do not clean chemically, as this may
destroy the webbing.<
Interior sensors/cameras
To clean interior sensors and cameras, e.g. of
the High-beam Assistant, use a lint-free cloth
moistened with glass cleaner.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
269
Mobility
Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
Wiper blades
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
Coupe
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1,
and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mechanism, pulling the blade toward the front.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood.<
Lamps and bulbs
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored in a compartment on the right-hand side of the cargo
area. Remove the cover.
Convertible
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored in a pouch
under the cargo area floor panel.
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. They should, therefore,
be handled carefully. BMW recommends having your BMW center perform any work that you
do not feel competent to perform yourself or
that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
Replacement bulb sets are available at your
BMW center.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to
the touch; otherwise, you could suffer
burns.<
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Replacing components
Mobility
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the consumer in question; otherwise, short-circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.<
Have all work on the xenon lamp system,
including bulb replacements, performed
only by your BMW center. Due to high voltage,
there is a risk of fatal injury if work on the xenon
lamps is carried out improperly.<
For care of the headlamps, please follow the
instructions in the chapter entitled 'Care'.
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
To replace lamps not described here,
please contact your BMW center.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Access to the lamps
2. Remove the upper cover from the headlamp. To do so, use a screwdriver to press
the catches towards the rear, see arrows,
and pull the cover forward and out.
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translucent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls, displays, and equipment in your
vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which
operate using a concept similar to that applied
in conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours; otherwise, this could cause
irritation of the retina.<
Headlight lenses
In cool or humid weather, condensation may
form on the interior of outside lamps. The condensation will disappear after a short time when
driving with the headlamps switched on. The
headlamp glasses do not need to be changed.
If the headlamps do not defrost despite driving
with the headlamps switched on, and additional
moisture builds up, for example water droplets
in the lamps, have them checked by your BMW
center.
Xenon lamps
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails nevertheless, switch on the fog lamps and continue
the journey with great care, provided that local
legislation does not prohibit this.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reattach the cover.
Be careful when installing the cover; otherwise, leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlamp system.<
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lights
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
If they malfunction, please contact your BMW
center.
Corner-illuminating lamps
H3 bulb, 55 watts
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the cover, refer to Access to the
lamps.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
271
Mobility
Replacing components
3. Push the wire bracket out of the anchor
towards the right and fold it up.
Tail lamps
Coupe: overview
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part
is in the trunk lid, the other is in the fender.
4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
5. Insert the bulb.
6. Fold the wire bracket down and engage it.
1
Backup lamp
7. Reattach the cover.
2
Brake lamp
3
Parking/tail lamps
Turn signals, front
4
Turn signal
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
If they malfunction, please contact your BMW
center.
5
Brake Force Display lamp
6
Parking/tail lamps
Convertible: overview
Side turn signals
W5W bulb, 5 watts
1. Press the front edge of the lamp toward the
rear with your fingertip, arrow 1 and pivot it
out, arrow 2.
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part
is in the trunk lid, the other is in the fender.
1
Backup lamp
2
Brake lamp
2. While simultaneously lifting the retaining
tab, rotate bulb holder to the left and
remove.
3
Parking/tail lamps
4
Turn signal
5
Brake Force Display lamp
3. Remove lamp and replace it.
6
Parking/tail lamps
To install, insert rear end of the lamp and press
into place at the front.
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Replacing components
Mobility
Backup lamp
If these lamps malfunction, please contact your
BMW center.
Turn signal, brake, license plate,
parking, and tail lamps
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
If they malfunction, please contact your BMW
center.
Coupe: Brake Force Display lamp in the
trunk lid
H21W bulb, 21 watts
1. Take the warning triangle out of its holder,
refer to page 277. Unscrew the holder using
the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle
tool kit.
2. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the
trunk lid using a screwdriver and remove the
trim.
3. Release the bulb holder, see arrow, and
remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
5. Attach the bulb holder.
1. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the
trunk lid using a screwdriver and remove the
trim.
2. Release the bulb holder, see arrow, and
remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
4. Attach the bulb holder.
5. Attach trunk lid trim.
Convertible: Brake Force Display lamp
in the trunk lid
H21W bulb, 21 watts
6. Reattach the trim of the trunk lid and the
holder for the warning triangle.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as
standard. This eliminates the need to change a
wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.
For information on continuing to drive with a
damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on
page 101.
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
Run-flat tires, page 257.
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer
also to New wheels and tires, page 257.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
273
Mobility
Replacing components
The tools for changing wheels are available as optional accessories from your
BMW center.<
Jack mounting points
Jump-starting terminals
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine off. Connections, refer to Jump-starting
on page 278.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise
have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to
page 90.
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
the illustration.
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, refer to page 174.
Vehicle battery
> Navigation system
Operability must be waited for, refer to
page 148.
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.
Battery replacing
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully
available.<
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery
> Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be
tilted. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 53.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 125.
> Active steering
The system automatically initializes itself
briefly during a trip. The system is deactivated during this time, refer to page 105.
> xDrive
The system automatically initializes itself
during a trip. Indicator lamps light up during
this time. If the lamps do not go out during
the current trip, have the system checked.
Note
Do not connect battery chargers to the
sockets built into the vehicle at the plant;
doing so may damage the vehicle.<
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Replacing components
Mobility
Disposal of old battery
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or bring them to a collection
point. Maintain the battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Always secure the
battery against tipping over during transport.<
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating; otherwise, this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Open the cover in the glove compartment and
remove it.
Plastic tweezers are located on the distributor
box.
See the rear of the cover for information on fuse
assignment.
Spare fuses are available at your BMW center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
275
Mobility
Giving and receiving assistance
Giving and receiving assistance
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descriptions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
It may be possible for a BMW center to reactivate the system after a new contract has been
signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
Emergency Request
Requirements
> Full preparation package mobile phone: this
equipment makes it possible to send an
Emergency Request even if no mobile
phone is paired with the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged into a
mobile phone network that is supported by
BMW Assist.
> The Emergency Request system is operable.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Subscriber contract
Upon expiration of the subscriber contract with
BMW Assist, the BMW Assist system can be
deactivated by a BMW center without a workshop visit.
After the system is deactivated, it is no longer
possible to make Emergency Requests.
276
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button comes on.
> The LED comes on: the Emergency
Request has been triggered.
If the circumstances allow, remain in the
vehicle until the voice contact has been
established.
> The LED flashes when the connection to
the BMW Assist Response Center has been
established.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center
has received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts
you and takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Assist Response Center will be able
to initiate further steps to assist you under
certain conditions.
Data for determining the necessary rescue
measures are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. the current position of your vehicle, if it can be
determined.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
> If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. The
BMW Assist Response Center may still be
able to hear you, however.
Mobility
Convertible
Automatically triggering an Emergency
Request
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is sent automatically immediately after
a severe accident. An automatic Emergency
Request is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance is available by
phone around the clock in many countries. You
can obtain support there in the event of a breakdown.
The first aid pouch is located in a compartment
under the front passenger seat.
To open: press the button and fold the cover
down.
To close: fold the cover back up and press it into
the catch.
Warning triangle
Coupe
First aid pouch
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any items in good time, if necessary.
Coupe
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side of the cargo area. Press the tab to take it
out.
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand
side of the cargo area in a storage area.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
277
Mobility
Giving and receiving assistance
Convertible
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could
cause injury occur.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment which acts as the battery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine
compartment overview on page 259. The cap is
marked with +.
The warning triangle is located in a holder in the
trunk lid. Press the tabs to take it out.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting connection up to remove.
Jump-starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's
engine can be started by connecting two
jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal accident may occur. Carefully adhere to the following sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible
personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the battery.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative pole.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of shorting.<
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
Mobility
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the
tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Release the cover panel in the bumper:
Press on the upper part of the cover panel.
Front
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Rear
Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing vehicles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the BMW.
Coupe: it is stored in the onboard vehicle tool kit
underneath the cover on the right-hand side of
the cargo area, refer to page 270.
Convertible: it is stored in the onboard vehicle
tool kit underneath the cargo area floor, refer to
page 270.
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 61; otherwise, the low-beam
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
windshield wipers may be unavailable.
Power steering assistance is not available when
the engine is not running. Thus, braking and
steering will require increased effort. Active
steering is not active and it will be necessary to
turn the steering wheel further.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
279
Mobility
Giving and receiving assistance
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
Automatic transmission
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Selector lever in position N.
Changing selector lever positions, refer to
page 64.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph
or 70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
Make sure that the parking lock P is not
engaged; otherwise, the rear wheels are
immobilized.
When using the car wash function, refer to
page 267, note that the parking lock P is
engaged automatically after approx.
30 minutes, blocking the rear wheels.
In the event of an electrical malfunction or if the
vehicle must be towed for more than approx.
20 minutes, unlock the parking lock manually,
refer to page 69.<
With a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
With a tow truck: vehicle without xDrive
Manual and automatic transmission:
When towing, do not exceed a maximum
speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h and a maximum distance traveled of 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged.<
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.<
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch:
With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle,
please observe the following:
280
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar, or on a flatbed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
Mobility
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle
raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
With a tow truck: vehicle with xDrive
Do not tow a BMW with xDrive with just
the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the
wheels could lock up and the transfer case
could be damaged.<
Have the BMW transported on a flatbed surface
only.
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possible; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to
page 278Vehicles with a catalytic converter
should only be tow-started when the engine is
cold; vehicles with an automatic transmission or
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch cannot be tow-started at all.
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply
with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 61.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
With xDrive: do not activate Hill Descent
Control HDC when the vehicle is being
tow-started, page 99.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system and
an index that will help you find information most
quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Reference
Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. As a result, some equipment described may not be available in a partic-
ular vehicle, for example due to the options or
national-market version selected. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Engine data
Coupe
Displacement
cu in/cmμ
Number of cylinders
Maximum power output
at engine speed
hp
328i/xDrive
335i/xDrive
335is
182.8/2,996
181.8/2,979
181.8/2,979
6
6
6
230
300
320
rpm
6,500
5,800
5,900
Maximum torque
lb ft/Nm
200/270
300/407
332/450
with Overboost
lb ft/Nm
–
–
369/500
2,750 1,300-5,000
1,500
at engine speed
rpm
Convertible
Displacement
328i
335i
335is
cu in/cmμ
182.8/2,996
181.8/2,979
181.8/2,979
6
6
6
hp
230
300
320
Number of cylinders
Maximum power output
at engine speed
rpm
6,500
5,800
5,900
Maximum torque
lb ft/Nm
200/270
300/407
332/450
with Overboost
lb ft/Nm
–
–
369/500
2,750 1,300-5,000
1,500
at engine speed
284
rpm
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Technical data
Reference
Dimensions
Coupe
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 36.1 ft/11.0 m, with xDrive: 38.7 ft/11.8 m
335i: height approx. 54.1 in/1,375 mm
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
285
Reference
Technical data
Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 36.1 ft/11.0 m
335i: height approx. 54.0 in/1,370 mm
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Reference
Technical data
Weights
Coupe
328i
328i
xDrive
335i
335i
xDrive
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission
lbs./kg 4,288/1,945 4,508/2,045 4,486/2,035 4,663/2,115
> with automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,354/1,975 4,552/2,065 4,508/2,045 4,685/2,125
Load
lbs./kg
Approved front axle load
lbs./kg
Approved rear axle load
lbs./kg 2,425/1,100 2,447/1,110 2,469/1,120 2,513/1,140
Approved roof load capacity
lbs./kg
165/75
165/75
165/75
165/75
cu ft/
liters
15.5/440
15.5/440
15.2/430
15.2/430
Cargo area capacity
882/400
882/400
2,061/935 2,227/1,010
882/400
882/400
2,172/985 2,326/1,055
335is
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission
lbs./kg
4,497/2,040
> Sport automatic transmission with double clutch
lbs./kg
4,519/2,050
Load
lbs./kg
882/400
Approved front axle load
lbs./kg
2,183/990
Approved rear axle load
lbs./kg
2,513/1,140
Approved roof load capacity
lbs./kg
165/75
cu ft/
liters
15.2/430
Cargo area capacity
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
287
Reference
Technical data
Convertible
328i
335i
335is
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission
lbs./kg
> with automatic transmission lbs./kg
4,707/2,135 4,817/2,185 4,839/2,195
4,773/2,165 4,839/2,195
–
> Sport automatic transmission with double clutch
lbs./kg
–
Load
lbs./kg
838/380
Approved front axle load
lbs./kg
2,138/970 2,205/1,000 2,227/1,010
Approved rear axle load
lbs./kg
2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200
Approved roof load capacity
lbs./kg
–
–
–
cu ft/
liters
7.4-12.4/
210-350
7.4-12.4/
210-350
7.4-12.4/
210-350
Cargo area capacity
288
– 4,872/2,210
838/380
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
838/380
Reference
Technical data
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank
US gal/liters
approx. 16.1/61
including reserve of
US gal/liters
approx. 2.1/8.0
Window washer system
including headlamp washers
Fuel grade: page 237
For more details: page 72
US quarts/liters
approx. 6.3/6.0
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
289
Reference
Short commands for the voice activation system
Short commands for the voice activation
system
Vehicle equipment
General information
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. As a result, some equipment described may not be available in a particular vehicle, for example due to the options or
national-market version selected. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 25.
Having the possible spoken commands read
aloud: {Voice commands}.
The following short commands are for vehicles
with the voice activation system. They do not
function with equipment packages that permit
only the mobile phone to be operated by voice.
Useful short commands
Function
Command
Opening a music collection
{Music collection}
Opening the tone control
{Tone}
Opening the settings
{Settings}
Accessing the onboard computer
{Onboard info}
Opening the contacts
{Contacts}
Displaying phone book
{Phonebook}
Accessing services
{Assist}
Accessing BMW Assist
{B M W Assist}
Accessing ConnectedDrive
{Connected Drive}
Opening the home address
{Home address}
Opening destination entry
{Enter address}
Opening destination guidance
{Guidance}
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
Reference
CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Function
Command
Selecting a track
{Track …} e.g. track 5
or
{C D track …} e.g. CD track 5
Playing back a CD
{C D on}
Selecting a CD
{Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track
{C D … track …} e.g. CD 3 track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu
{C D and multimedia}
CD and DVD
{C D}
Displaying entertainment details on the Split
screen
{Entertainment details}
Music collection
Function
Command
Searching for music; opening the menu
{Music search}
Calling up the current playback
{Current playback}
Opening a music collection
{Music collection}
Playing back a music collection
{Music collection on}
Playing back the most frequently played tracks
{Top fifty}
External devices
Function
Command
Opening external devices
{External devices}
Accessing Bluetooth devices
{Bluetooth}
AUX front
{AUX}
Tone control
Function
Command
Opening the tone control
{Tone}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
291
Reference
Short commands for the voice activation system
Radio
FM
Function
Command
Selecting a station directly
{Station …} e.g. National Public Radio
Calling up the radio
{Radio}
Calling up an FM station
{F M}
Opening manual search
{Manual}
Selecting the frequency range
{Select frequency}
Calling up a station
{Select station}
AM
Function
Command
Calling up an AM station
{A M}
Opening manual search
{Manual}
Satellite radio
Function
Command
Calling up the satellite radio
{Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio
{Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel
{Select satellite radio} e.g. channel 2
Presets
Function
Command
Opening the stored stations
{Presets}
Choosing a stored station
{Select preset}
Selecting a stored station
{Preset …} e.g. stored station 2
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
Reference
Telephone
Function
Command
Dialing a phone number
{Dial number}
Opening the Telephone menu
{Telephone}
Displaying phone book
{Phonebook}
Redialing
{Redial}
Displaying accepted calls
{Received calls}
Displaying the list of messages
{Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth devices
{Bluetooth}
Office
Function
Command
Opening Office menu
{Office}
Displaying current Office
{Current office}
Displaying contacts
{Contacts}
Displaying messages
{Messages}
Displaying calendar
{Calendar}
Displaying tasks
{Tasks}
Displaying reminders
{Reminders}
Contacts
Function
Command
Select a name
{Choose name}
Opening the contacts
{Contacts}
My contacts
{My contacts}
New contact
{New contact}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
293
Reference
Short commands for the voice activation system
Navigation
General information
Function
Command
Navigation menu
{Navigation}
Opening destination entry
{Enter address}
Entering an address
{Enter address}
Opening destination guidance
{Guidance}
Starting destination guidance
{Start guidance}
Ending destination guidance
{Stop guidance}
Opening the home address
{Home address}
Opening the route criteria
{Route preference}
Opening the route
{Route information}
Switching on the voice instructions
{Switch on voice instructions}
Repeating a voice instruction
{Repeat voice instructions}
Switching off the voice instructions
{Switch off voice instructions}
Displaying the address book
{Address book}
Displaying the last destinations
{Last destinations}
Opening the traffic bulletins
{Traffic Info}
Special destinations
{Points of interest}
Map
Function
Command
Displaying the map
{Map}
Map facing north
{Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel
{Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map
{Map perspective view}
Automatic map scaling
{Map with automatic scaling}
Changing the scale
{Map scale}
Scale...meters
{Map scale … meters} e.g. map scale of
100 meters
Scale...kilometers
{Map scale … kilometers} e.g. Split screen
scale of 5 kilometers
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
Reference
Split screen settings
Function
Command
Split screen
{Switch on splitscreen}
Switching off the Split screen
{Turn off split screen}
Adapting the Split screen
{Split screen content}
Split screen, current position
{Split screen current position}
Split screen, map facing north
{Split screen map facing north}
Split screen, direction of travel
{Split screen map in direction of travel}
Split screen, perspective
{Split screen perspective}
Expanded intersection zoom on the Split screen
{Splitscreen Exit ramp view}
Split screen scale ... meters
{Split screen scale … meters} e.g. Split screen
scale of 100 meters
Split screen scale ... kilometers
{Split screen scale … kilometers} e.g.
Split screen scale of 5 kilometers
Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins
{Split screen, Traffic conditions}
Split screen, computer
{Split screen on board info}
Split screen, trip computer
{Splitscreen trip computer}
Automatically scaling the Split screen
{Split screen automatic scaling}
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function
Command
Entering a new destination
{Enter address}
Trip list
{Stored trips}
Contacts
Function
Command
Opening the contacts
{Contacts}
My contacts
{My contacts}
New contact
{New contact}
ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist
Function
Command
Accessing BMW Assist
{B M W Assist}
Accessing ConnectedDrive
{Connected Drive}
Accessing BMW Online
{B M W Online}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
295
Reference
Short commands for the voice activation system
Vehicle information
Function
Command
Accessing the onboard computer
{Onboard info}
Opening the trip computer
{Trip computer}
Opening the vehicle information
{Vehicle info}
Opening the vehicle status
{Vehicle status}
Settings
Vehicle
Function
Command
Opening the main menu
{Main menu}
Opening the settings
{Settings}
Opening the options
{Options}
Settings on the Control Display
{Control display}
Opening the time and date settings
{Time and date}
Opening the language and unit settings
{Language and units}
Opening the speed limit settings
{Speed}
Opening the light settings
{Lighting}
Opening the door lock settings
{Door locks}
Opening profiles
{Profiles}
Equipment
Function
Command
Opening the air conditioning settings
{Climate}
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Reference
297
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 97
ACC, refer to Active Cruise
Control 75
Acceleration assistant, refer to
Launch Control 70
Accessories, refer to Vehicle
equipment 5
Accident, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 276
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate
control 120
Active Cruise Control 75
– indicator lamp 78
– malfunction 79
– selecting distance 77
– sensor 78
Active steering 105
Adaptive brake lamp
– Brake Force Display 106
Adaptive Light Control 112
Additives
– coolant 263
– engine oil 262
Address, entering 150, 156
Address for navigation
– entering 150
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic
climate control 117
Adjusting the thigh support 49
Airbags 107
– indicator/warning lamp 108
– sitting safely 47
Air conditioning mode
– automatic climate
control 117
– ventilation 119
298
Air distribution
– automatic 118
Airing, refer to Ventilation 119
Air pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 239
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated air mode 118
Air supply
– automatic climate
control 117
– ventilation 119
Air vents 116
Air volume 118
AKI, refer to Fuel grade 237
Alarm system 37
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 38
– interior motion sensor 38
– switching off an alarm 37
– tilt alarm sensor 37
ALL program 119
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 258
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 99
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated air mode 118
Antifreeze
– coolant 263
– washer fluid 72
Antilock Brake System
ABS 97
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 37
Appointments, refer to
Calendar 223
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 287
Approved engine oils 262
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 287
Apps 232
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 126
Arrival time, refer to
Computer 84
Ashtray 128
Assist systems, refer to
Driving stability control 97
AUC Automatic recirculated
air control 118
Audible instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 161
Audio device, external 127
Automatic
– air distribution 118
– air volume 118
– cruise control 73, 75
– headlamp control 110
Automatic car washes 266
Automatic climate control 116
Automatic curb monitor 55
Automatic high beams and
low beams, refer to Highbeam Assistant 113
Automatic recirculated air
control AUC 118
Automatic Service
Request 232
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– interlock 64
– overriding selector lever
lock 66
– shiftlock, refer to Changing
selector lever position 64
– sport program 65
– towing 279
– tow-starting 279
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
AUX-IN
– port 127
Available services 232
Average fuel consumption 84
– setting the units 87
Average speed 84
Avoid highways in
navigation 159
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 38
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 287
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 49
Backrests, refer to Seat
adjustment 48
Backrest width adjustment 49
Back seats
– refer to Rear seats 51
Bag holder 131
Band-aids, refer to First aid
pouch 277
Bar, refer to Towing
methods 280
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter 216
– refer to Snap-in adapter in
the center armrest storage
compartment 126
Battery 274
– charging 274
– disposal 40, 275
– jump-starting 278
– remote control 30
– replacing 274
– temporary power failure 274
Battery renewal
– remote control 40
– remote control for vehicle 40
Being towed 279
Belt hand-over 54
– pinch protection system 54
Belts, refer to Safety belts 53
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 53
Beverage holders, refer to
Cupholders 128
Black ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 82
Blinds, refer to Roller
sunblinds 126
Blower, refer to Air
volume 118
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 205
BMW
– car shampoo 269
BMW Assist 228
– updating 232
BMW Homepage 4
BMW Info 222
BMW Maintenance
System 264
BMW Online 230
BMW webpage 4
Bottle holders, refer to
Cupholders 128
Brake Assist, refer to Dynamic
Brake Control DBC 97
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 87
Brake Force Display 106
Brake lamps
– Brake Force Display 106
Brake pads 138
– breaking in 138
Brake pedal, refer to Braking
safely 140
Brake rotors 141
– brakes 138
– breaking in 138
Brakes
– ABS 97
– BMW Maintenance
System 264
– Brake Force Display 106
– breaking in 138
– parking brake 63
– service requirements 87
Reference
Brakes, refer to Braking
safely 140
Brake system 138
– BMW Maintenance
System 264
– breaking in 138
– disc brakes 141
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 277
Breaking in the clutch 138
Breaking in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 138
Break-in period 138
Brightness of the Control
Display 94
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 270
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/Stop button 61
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
C
Calendar 223
– displaying appointment 223
– selecting calendar day 223
California Proposition 65
warning 6
Call
– accepting 209
– ending 210
– muting the microphone 211
– rejecting 209
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 210
Calling, refer to Telephone
owner's manual
Calls
– with multiple parties 210
Can holders, refer to
Cupholders 128
Capacities 289
Capacity of the cargo area 287
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 274
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
299
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Car care, refer to Care 266
Care 266
– automatic car washes 266
– care products 266
– carpets 269
– CD/DVD drives 269
– chrome parts 268
– displays 269
– exterior 266
– fine wood parts 269
– headlamps 267
– high-pressure washer 267
– interior 268
– leather 268
– light-alloy wheels 268
– paintwork 267
– plastic parts 269
– retractable hardtop 267
– rubber seals 268
– safety belts 269
– sensors and cameras 269
– upholstery and cloth
trim 268
– washing the car
manually 267
– windows 267
Cargo, securing 143
Cargo area
– capacity 287
– Comfort Access 39
– folding up the floor
panel 132
– lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 114
– opening from inside 35
– opening from outside 36
Cargo loading 141
– securing cargo 143
– stowing cargo 142
– vehicle 141
Car jack
– jacking points 274
Car key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 30
300
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 126
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Car phone, refer to
Telephone 204
Car shampoo 269
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 140
Center armrest 126
Center brake lamp
– replacing bulb 273
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
Central locking
– from inside 35
– from outside 31
Central locking system 31
– Comfort Access 38
– hotel function 36
– setting unlocking
characteristics 32
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 270
Changing gears 68
Changing the language on the
Control Display 94
Changing the measurement
units on the Control
Display 87
Changing wheels 273
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 259
Check Control 92
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 58
Child restraint systems 57
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 57
Chrome parts 269
Chrome polish 269
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 129
Cleaning headlamps 72
– washer fluid 72
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 266
Climate control
– automatic air
distribution 118
Clock 82
– 12h/24h mode 91
– setting the time and date 90
– setting time 90
Closing
– from inside 35
– from outside 32
Clothes hooks 127
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 62
Comfort Access 38
– replacing the battery 40
Comfort access, refer to
Comfort Access 38
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 61
Compass 124
Computer 84
– displays on Control
Display 84
Computer, refer to iDrive 18
Concierge service 229
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 141
Condition Based Service
CBS 264
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 30
Confirmation signal for vehicle
locking/unlocking 33
ConnectedDrive 228
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
Consumption, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 84
Contacts 218
– deleting 220, 227
– exporting/importing 227
– new contact 219
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 18
Control Display 19
– switching off 19
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 18
– adjusting brightness 94
Controller, refer to iDrive 18
Controls and displays 10
Control unit, refer to iDrive 18
Convenient loading in
Convertible 33
Convenient opening and
closing
– glass roof 32
– glass roof with Comfort
Access 39
– retractable hardtop 32
– windows 32
– windows with Comfort
Access 39
– with Comfort Access 39
Convertible
– bag holder 131
– convenient loading 33
– enlarging cargo area 130
– folding down rear
backrest 130
– retractable hardtop 43
– rollover protection
system 109
– securing cargo 143
– stowing cargo 142
Coolant 263
– checking level 263
Coolant temperature 263
Cooling, maximum 117
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 263
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 263
Copyright 2
Corner-illuminating lamps
– replacing bulbs 271
Cornering light, refer to
Adaptive Light Control 112
Correct tires 257
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 114
Criteria for route 159
Cross-hairs in navigation 155
Cruise control 73
– active 75
– malfunction 75
Cruise control, refer to Active
Cruise Control 75
Cruising range 84
Cupholders 128
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 287
Customer Relations 231
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Dashboard, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 114
Data, technical 284
– capacities 289
– dimensions 285
– engine 284
– weights 287
Data memory 265
Data transfer 232
Date
– date format 91
– setting 91
Daytime running lights 111
– replacing bulbs 271
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 97
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 107
Reference
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 32
Defect
– door lock 34
– fuel filler flap 236
– glass roof 42
Defining a home address 219
Destination, entering by town/
city name 150
Destination address
– entering 150, 156
Destination entry via BMW
Assist 155
Destination for navigation
– entering by voice 156
– entering via map 155
– entry 150
– home address 153
– manual entry 150
Destination guidance 159
– bypassing a route
section 160
– changing specified
route 159
– continuing 159
– starting 159
– voice instructions 161
– volume of voice
instructions 161
Digital clock 82
Digital compass 124
Dimensions 285
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 71
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 161
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 152
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 284
Display, refer to iDrive
controls 18
Displaying contact
pictures 219
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
301
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Displays
– on the Control Display 18
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Displays and controls 10
Disposal
– coolant 263
– remote control battery 40
– vehicle battery 275
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 87
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 96
Door key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 30
Door lock 34
Doors, emergency
operation 34
DOT Quality Grades 255
Draft-free ventilation 120
Drinks holders, refer to
Cupholders 128
Drive mode 68
Drive-off assistance, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 97
Drive-off assistant 100
Driving dynamics control 69
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 110
Driving notes 138
Driving off on hills, refer to
Drive-off assistant 100
Driving stability control
systems 97
Driving through water 140
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 138
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 119
302
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 97
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 98
– indicator/warning lamp 98
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 97
Dynamic destination
guidance 166
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 97
– indicator/warning lamp 98
E
EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution 97
Electrical defect
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 69
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 34
– driver's door 34
– fuel filler flap 236
– glass roof 42
Electric seat adjustment 49
Electric steering wheel lock
– with Comfort Access 39
Electronic brake-force
distribution EBV 97
Electronic oil level check 260
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 97
E-mail 222
Emergency actuation,
automatic transmission,
refer to Overriding selector
lever lock 66
Emergency operation
– fuel filler flap, manual
release 236
Emergency operation, refer to
Closing manually
– glass roof 42
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 34
Emergency release
– trunk lid from inside 36
Emergency Request 276
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 277
Energy, saving
– saving fuel 138
Engine
– breaking in 138
– data 284
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 263
– speed 284
– starting 62
– starting, Comfort Access 38
– switching off 63
Engine compartment 259
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 263
Engine oil
– adding 262
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 262
– alternative oil types 263
– approved engine oils 262
– BMW Maintenance
System 264
– capacity 289
– checking level 260
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 87
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 284
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 284
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
Entering the postal code for
navigation 151
Entry lamps, refer to Interior
lamps 114
Entry map for destination 155
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 97
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 140
Exterior mirrors 55
– adjusting 55
– automatic dimming
feature 56
– automatic heating 55
– folding in and out 55
External audio device 127
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 279
– for tying down loads 143
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 92
Failure of an electrical
consumer 275
False alarm
– avoiding unintentional
alarm 38
– switching off an alarm 37
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 53
Fastest route for
navigation 159
Fault messages, refer to
Check Control 92
Filter
– refer to Microfilter/activatedcharcoal filter for automatic
climate control 120
First aid pouch 277
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 61
Flash when locking/
unlocking 33
Flat tire
– Run-flat tires 258
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 102
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 100
– indicating a flat tire 101
– indicator/warning lamp 101
– initialization 100
– snow chains 100, 258
– system limits 100
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 256
Fluid reservoir, refer to
Washer fluid reservoir 72
Fog lamps 114
– indicator lamp 13, 114
Folding up the floor panel 132
Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 114
For your own safety 5
Four-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 99
Front airbags 107
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 100
Fuel 237
– average consumption 84
– gauge 83
– high-quality brands 237
– quality 237
– specifications 237
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 289
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 83
Fuel consumption indicator
– average fuel
consumption 84
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 83
Fuel filler flap 236
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 236
Fuses 275
Reference
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 122
Gasoline
– refer to Average
consumption 84
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 237
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 83
Gas station
recommendations 161
Gear indicator, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 64
Gear indicator, refer to
Displays in the instrument
cluster 67
Gearshift lever 66
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– manual transmission 64
Gearshifts
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– manual transmission 64
General driving notes 139
Glass roof, electric 41
– closing after electrical
malfunction 42
– convenient opening and
closing 32, 34
– convenient opening and
closing with Comfort
Access 39
– initializing 42
– opening, closing 42
– pinch protection system 42
– power failure 42
– remote control 32
– tilting 41
Glove compartment 126
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
303
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Grills 116
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 287
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 63
Hands-free system 14, 213
Hazard warning flashers 14
HDC Hill Descent Control 99
Head airbags 107
Headlamp control,
automatic 110
Headlamp flasher 71
– indicator lamp 11, 13
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 112
Head restraints 50
– rear, removing 51
– sitting safely 47
Heated
– mirrors 55
– rear window 119
– seats 53
– steering wheel 56
Heating
– mirrors 55
– rear window 119
– seats 53
– steering wheel 56
Heating and ventilation, refer
to Climate 116
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 142
Height, refer to
Dimensions 285
Height adjustment
– seats 48
– steering wheel 56
High-beam Assistant 113
High beams 112
– headlamp flasher 112
– indicator lamp 13
High beams and low beams,
automatic, refer to Highbeam Assistant 113
304
High-pressure
washer 266, 267
High water, refer to Driving
through water 140
Highways, refer to Route
criteria 159
Hill Descent Control HDC 99
Hills 141
Holders for cups 128
Homepage BMW 4
Hood 260
Hooks for shopping bags 131
Horn 10, 11
Hotel function, refer to
Locking or unlocking
separately 36
Hot exhaust system 140
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to
Dynamic Brake Control 97
Hydroplaning 140
I
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 82
Identification marks
– Run-flat tires 258
– tire coding 255
iDrive 18
– adjusting brightness 94
– changing date and time 90
– changing language 94
– changing settings 94
– changing units of measure
and display format 87
– controls 18
– menu guidance 19
– operating principle 18
– overview 18
– start menu 19
– status information 21
iDrive operating principle 18
Ignition 62
– switched off 62
– switched on 62
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 30
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 61
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 62
Ignition lock 61
Imprint 2
Incoming call 209
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 103
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 239
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 102
Initializing
– after power failure 274
– compass, refer to
Calibrating 125
– Flat Tire Monitor FTM 100
– glass roof 42
– refer to Setting the time and
date 90
Installation location
– telephone 126
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 161
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument cluster, refer to
Cockpit 10
Instrument combination, refer
to Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 114
Integrated key 30
Integrated universal remote
control 122
Interactive map 155
Interior lamps 114
– remote control 33
Interior motion sensor 38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
Interior rearview mirror 56
– automatic dimming
feature 56
– compass 124
Interlock, refer to Disengaging
the remote control 64
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 71
Intersection, entering,
navigation 151
J
Jacking points 274
Joystick, refer to iDrive 18
Jumpering, refer to Jumpstarting 278
Jump-starting 278
K
Key, refer to Integrated key/
remote control 30
Keyless go, refer to Comfort
Access 38
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 38
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 30
Keypad dialing 212
Kickdown 65
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 65
Knock control 237
L
Lamps
– automatic headlamp
control 110
– parking lamps/low
beams 110
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 270
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 53
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 143
Last destinations 153
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 58
Launch Control 70
Leather care 268
LED Light-emitting
diodes 271
Length, refer to
Dimensions 285
License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 273
Light
– high-beam assistant 113
Light-alloy wheels 268
Light-emitting diodes
LED 271
Lighter 129
– connecting electrical
appliances 129
Lighting
– instruments 114
– lamps and bulbs 270
– vehicle, refer to Lamps 110
Light switch 110
Limit, refer to Speed limit 93
Load 142
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 143
Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 35
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 33
– from inside 35
– from outside 32
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 38
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 33
– from inside 35
– from outside 32
Low beam control, refer to
High-beam Assistant 113
Reference
Low-beam headlamps 110
– automatic 110
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 49
Luggage rack, refer to Roofmounted luggage rack 143
Lumbar support 49
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 258
Maintenance, refer to Service
and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in
the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian
models
Maintenance system 264
Malfunction
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 66
– tires 101
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 92
Manual car wash 267
Manually unlocking parking
lock 69
Manual mode, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Manual operation
– door lock 34
– driver's door 34
– fuel filler flap 236
– glass roof 42
– parking lock 69
– parking lock, automatic
transmission 66
Manual transmission 64
Map for navigation
– changing scale 163
– entering destination 155
Map view 162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
305
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Master key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 30
Maximum cooling 117
Maximum speed
– with winter tires 258
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions 285
Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 53
MENU button 18
Menus, refer to iDrive 18
Messages 220
Messages from the Concierge
service 221
Microfilter
– BMW Maintenance
System 264
– for automatic climate
control 120
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
– BMW Maintenance
System 264
Microphone
– telephone 14
– voice commands 14
Mirror dimming feature 56
Mirrors 55
– automatic curb monitor 55
– exterior mirrors 55
– heating 55
– interior rearview mirror 56
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 53
Mirrors, folding in before
entering a car wash 55
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 209
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 205
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 126
– operation 209
– pairing 205
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
– suitable mobile phones 204
– unpairing 207
– what to do if…. 208
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 126
Mobile phone, refer to
Telephone 204
Mobile phone, refer to the
separate Owner's Manual
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to iDrive
controls 18
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 100
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 71
– refer to Wiper system 71
Multimedia screen, refer to
iDrive 18
My Info 221
N
Navigation
– starting destination
guidance after entering a
destination 152
– storing current position 152
– voice activation 156
306
Navigation announcements,
refer to Switching voice
instructions on/off 161
Navigation data 148
Navigation system 148
– address book 152
– bypassing a route
section 160
– continuing destination
guidance 159
– destination entry 150
– dynamic destination
guidance 166
– entering a destination by
voice 156
– entering a destination
manually 150
– frequently asked
questions 167
– gas station
recommendations 161
– planning a trip 157
– route list 160
– selecting destination via
map 155
– selecting route criteria 159
– special destinations 153
– starting destination
guidance 159
– terminating destination
guidance 159
– traffic bulletins 163
– voice instructions 161
– volume adjustment 161
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 50
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 127
Neutral 67
New tires 257
Next Service indicator, refer to
Condition Based Service
CBS 264
North-facing map 162
Notes 224
Nozzles 116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 284
Nylon rope, refer to Tow
rope 280
Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 263
Overriding selector lever
lock 66
O
P
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for Onboard Diagnosis 265
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 237
Odometer 82
Office 217
– current office 217
– what to do if…. 225
Oil, refer to Engine oil 260
Oil consumption 260
Oil level 260
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 275
Onboard vehicle tool kit 270
Opening and closing
– Comfort Access 38
– from inside 35
– from outside 32
– using the door lock 34
– using the remote control 32
Opening and closing
retractable hardtop 44
Options, selecting for
navigation 159
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 19
Outlets
– refer to Ventilation 119
Output, refer to Engine
data 284
Outside-air mode
– automatic climate
control 118
Outside temperature
display 82
– changing unit of measure 87
– in computer 87
Outside temperature
warning 82
Paintwork care 267
Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 96
Park Distance Control PDC 96
Parked car ventilation 120
– preselecting switch-on
times 120
– switching on and off
directly 120
Parking
– vehicle 63
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 96
Parking brake 63
– indicator lamp 63
Parking lamps 110
– replacing bulbs 271
Parking lamps/low beams 110
Parts and accessories, refer to
Vehicle equipment 5
Passenger side mirror tilt
function 55
Pathway lighting 111
Personal information, refer to
Office 217
Personal Profile 30
Phone numbers
– dialing 210
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 42
– windows 41
Polish 269
Pollen
– refer to Microfilter/activatedcharcoal filter for automatic
climate control 120
Power failure 274
Power windows 40
Reference
Power windows, refer to
Windows 40
Pressure, tires 239
Pressure monitoring, tires 100
– Flat Tire Monitor 100
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 102
Programmable buttons on the
steering wheel 11
Programmable memory
keys 23
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 42
– windows 41
Providing medical assistance,
refer to First aid pouch 277
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 100
R
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 61
Radio readiness 61
– switched off 62
– switched on 61
Radio-remote key, refer to
Remote control with
integrated key 30
Rain sensor 72
Reading aloud 225
Reading lamps 115
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 272
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 51
– folding down backrests 130
Rear ventilation 120
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 55
Rear window defroster 119
Rear window roller blind, refer
to Roller sunblinds 126
Recirculated air mode 118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
307
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated air mode 118
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 48
Redialing 212
Refueling 236
Releasing
– hood 260
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 84
Reminders 224
Remote control 30
– battery renewal 40
– Comfort Access 38
– garage door opener 122
– malfunction 34, 39
– removing from the ignition
lock 61
– service data 264
– trunk lid 33
Replacement fuses, refer to
Fuses 275
Replacement remote
control 30
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 270
Replacing tires 257
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 257
Reporting safety defects 7
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 83
Restraint systems
– for children 57
– refer to Safety belts 53
Retractable hardtop 43
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– convenient opening and
closing 32
– remote control 32
Reverse gear 67
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 65
– manual transmission 64
308
Road map 162
Roadside
Assistance 229, 277
Roadside parking lamps 112
– replacing bulbs 271
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 87
Roller sunblinds 126
Rollover protection system,
Convertible 109
– resetting 109
Roof load capacity 287
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 143
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 280
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 18
Route 159, 160
– bypassing sections 160
– changing 159, 160
– changing criteria 159
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 160
– map view 162
– selecting 159
Route instructions, refer to
Destination guidance
through voice
instructions 161
Route map, refer to Map
view 162
Route section, changing 160
Route selection 159
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Runflat tires 258
Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-flat
tires 258
Run-flat tires 258
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 101
– flat tire 101
– Flat Tire Monitor 101
– inflation pressure 239
– new tires 257
– tire replacement 257
– winter tires 258
Runflat tyres, refer to Run-flat
tires 258
S
Safety-belt height
adjustment 54
Safety belts 53
– belt hand-over 54
– damage 54
– indicator/warning lamp 54
– reminder 54
– sitting safely 47
Safety systems
– airbags 107
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 97
– brake system 97
– driving stability control 97
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 97
– rollover protection system,
Convertible 109
– safety belts 53
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 258
Saving fuel 138
Screen, refer to iDrive
controls 18
Screw thread for tow
fitting 279
Seat adjustment
– electric 49
– mechanical 48
Seat and mirror memory 53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
Seat belt reminder, refer to
Fasten safety belts
reminder 54
Seat heating 53
Seats 48
– adjusting electrically 49
– adjusting the seats 48
– heating 53
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 53
– saving a setting, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 53
– sitting safely 47
Securing cargo 133, 134
Securing the vehicle
– from inside 35
– from outside 32
Selecting distance for Active
Cruise Control 77
Selecting new scale for
navigation 163
Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
Selector lever lock, refer to
Changing selector lever
positions, shiftlock 64
Selector lever positions 66
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 277
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 277
Service data in the remote
control 264
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 264
Service Request 231
Service requirements 87
Service status 232
Settings
– changing settings on the
Control Display 94
– clock, 12h/24h format 91
– language 94
Settings and information 86
Settings for the map view 163
Setting times, refer to
Preselecting switch-on
times 120
Shifting 68
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 68
Shifting gears
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 65
– manual transmission 64
Shift into a drive position, refer
to selector lever
positions 66
Shiftlock
– automatic transmission,
refer to Changing selector
lever positions 64
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 68
Short commands for the voice
activation system 290
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 159
Side airbags 107
Side windows, refer to
Windows 40
Signal horn, refer to
Horn 10, 11
Sitting safely 47
– with airbags 47
– with head restraint 47
– with safety belts 47
Ski bag 132
Ski bag for Convertible, refer
to Through-loading opening
with integrated transport
bag 133
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass roof, electric 41
Slot for remote control 61
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 129
Snap-in adapter 204
– inserting/removing 216
Reference
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest storage
compartment 126
Socket, Onboard Diagnosis
OBD 265
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 129
SOS, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 276
Spare fuses 275
Special destinations 153
Special destinations,
displaying 155
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 262
Specified engine oils, refer to
Approved engine oils 262
Speed
– Run-flat tires 101
– with winter tires 258
Speed limit 93
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 93
Speedo, refer to
Speedometer 12
Speedometer 12
Split screen content, refer to
Selecting the display for the
split screen content 22
Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch 66
– driving dynamics control 69
– kickdown 68
– Launch Control 70
– manually unlocking parking
lock 69
– neutral 67
– reverse gear 67
Sport program with 7-gear
Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 68
Spray nozzles, refer to
Cleaning windshield and
headlamps 72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
309
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 97
Start/Stop button 61
– starting the engine 62
– switching off the engine 63
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 62
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump-starting 278
Starting difficulties
– jump-starting 278
Starting the engine
– Start/Stop button 61
Start menu 19
State/province, for
navigation 150
Status information on the
Control Display 21
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam jet 266, 267
Steering wheel 56
– adjustment 56
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– heating 56
– lock 61
– locking with Comfort
Access 39
– shift paddles 68
Steering wheel buttons, refer
to Shift paddles 68
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 105
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 64
Storage 269
Storage compartments 127
Storage nets 131
Stored trip, calling up 158
Storing a destination in the
address book 152
Storing seat positions, refer to
Seat and mirror memory 53
310
Storing tires 258
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 127
Street, entering,
navigation 151
Suitable mobile phones 204
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 239
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 63
Switching off the engine
– Start/Stop button 61
Switching the cooling function
on and off 119
Switch-on times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 120
Symbols 4
T
Tachometer 83
Tailgate, refer to Trunk lid 35
Tail lamp, refer to Tail
lamps 272
Tail lamps 272
– replacing bulb 272, 273
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 289
Tasks 223
Technical data 284
– dimensions 285
Technical modifications, refer
to For your own safety 5
Telephone 204
– hands-free system 213
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 126
– phone book 212
– received calls 213
– redialing 212
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
– voice commands 214
TeleService 229
Teleservice Diagnosis 230
Temperature
– automatic climate
control 117
– changing unit of measure 87
– coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 263
Temperature display
– outside temperature 82
– outside temperature
warning 82
– setting the units 87
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 73
Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 143
Text message 221
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 273
Through-loading opening with
integrated transport
bag 133
Through-loading system 130
Tilt alarm sensor 37
Tilt function, passenger side
mirror 55
Timer, refer to Preselecting
switch-on times 120
Tire inflation pressure 239
– loss 101, 102
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 100
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 102
– resetting the system 103
– system limitations 102
– warning lamp 103
Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 101
Tire Quality Grading 255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
Tires
– age 255, 257
– air loss 103
– breaking in 138
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 273
– condition 256
– damage 256
– inflation pressure 239
– labels 255
– minimum tread depth 256
– new wheels and tires 257
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 100
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 102
– puncture 101
– replacing 257
– Run-flat tires 258
– size 255
– storage 258
– tread depth 256
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 256
– wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 257
– winter tires 258
TMC station, refer to Traffic
bulletins 163
Tools, refer to Onboard
vehicle tool kit 270
Top, refer to Retractable
hardtop 43
Torque, refer to Engine
data 284
Tow bar 280
Tow fitting 279
– screw thread 279
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 279
Towing 279
– car with automatic
transmission 279
– methods 280
– with 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 280
Towing and tow-starting 279
Town/city, for navigation 150
Tow rope 280
Tow-starting 279, 281
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 102
Traction control, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 97
Traffic bulletins
– categories 165
Traffic bulletins, filtering 165
Traffic bulletins for
navigation 163
– during destination
guidance 165
Traffic bulletins in navigation
– screen display in the map
view 165
Traffic congestion
– displaying traffic
bulletins 163
– refer to Route, bypassing
segments 160
Transmission
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 66
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– idle position 67
– Launch Control 70
– manually unlocking parking
lock 69
– manual transmission 64
– overriding selector lever lock
for automatic transmission
with Steptronic 66
– reverse gear 67
Reference
Transmission interlock
– refer to Changing selector
lever position 64
– refer to P Park 64
Transporting children
safely 57
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 143
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 256
Trip, deleting 158
Trip, storing 158
Trip computer, refer to
Displays on the Control
Display 84
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 82
Triple turn signal activation 71
Trip odometer 82
Trips, changing 158
Trunk lid 35
– Comfort Access 39
– emergency release 36
– locking or unlocking
separately 36
– opening from inside 35
– opening from outside 36
– remote control 33
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 285
Turn signal 71
Turn signal indicators
– indicator/warning lamp 12
Turn signals
– triple turn signal 71
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 143
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 255
Units
– average fuel
consumption 87
Units of measure
– temperature 87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
311
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 122
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 38
Unlocking
– from inside 35
– from outside 32
– setting unlocking
characteristics 32
– trunk lid 39
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 38
Updating the navigation
data 148
Using contact data 224
Voice commands
– overview 25
– short commands 290
– telephone 214
Voice instructions from
navigation system 161
– repeating 161
– switching on/off 161
– volume 161
Voice phone book 215
Volume
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 289
– mobile phone 209
– voice instructions 161
W
V
Variable light distribution,
refer to Adaptive Light
Control 112
Vehicle
– battery 274
– breaking in 138
– cargo loading 141
– identification number, refer
to Engine compartment 259
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 285
– parking 63
– weight 287
Vehicle equipment 5
Vehicle jack 274
Vehicle storage 269
Ventilation 119
– draft-free 120
– in the rear 120
Ventilation, refer to
Climate 116
Ventilation while at a
standstill 120
Vents, refer to Ventilation 119
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance through voice
instructions 161
312
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 92
Warning triangle 277
Washer fluid 72
– content of the reservoir 73
Washer fluid reservoir 72
Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 128
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 140
Water penetration 266, 267
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 256
Weights 287
Welcome lamps 111
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 257
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 285
Wheels, new 257
Wheels and tires 239
Width, refer to
Dimensions 285
Wind deflector 45
Windows 40
– convenient opening and
closing 32
– convenient opening and
closing with Comfort
Access 39
– opening, closing 40
– pinch protection system 41
Windows, indicator on Control
Display 18
Windshield
– cleaning 72
Windshield wash 71
– filling capacity, reservoir 289
– nozzles 72
– reservoir for washer fluid 72
– washer fluid 72
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 270
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 71
Winter tires 258
– setting speed limit 93
– storage 258
Wiper blade replacement 270
Wiper system 71
Work in the engine
compartment 260
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard vehicle tool kit 270
X
xDrive 99
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 271
Y
Your individual vehicle
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG
More about BMW
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
01 40 2 609 333 ue iDrive
bmwusa.com
*BL260933300O*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 333 - © 08/11 BMW AG